Agilent Technologies Ventilation Hood Agilent 86120C User Manual

Agilent 86120C  
Multi-Wavelength Meter  
User’s Guide  
sA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Agilent 86120C—At a Glance  
The Agilent 86120C—At a Glance  
The Agilent 86120C Multi- Wavelength Meter measures the wavelength  
and optical power of laser light in the 1270–1650 wavelength range.  
Because the Agilent 86120C simultaneously measures multiple laser  
lines, you can characterize wavelength- division- multiplexed (WDM)  
systems and the multiple lines of Fabry- Perot lasers.  
NOTE  
The front-panel OPTICAL INPUT connector uses a single-mode input fiber.  
C A U T IO N  
For Option 022 instruments, the front-panel OPTICAL INPUT connector is an  
angled physical contact interface.  
Characterize laser lines easily  
With the Agilent 86120C you can quickly and easily measure any of  
the following parameters:  
• Measure up to 200 laser lines simultaneously  
• Wavelengths and powers  
• Average wavelength  
• Total optical power  
• Laser line separation  
• Laser drift (wavelength and power)  
• Signal- to-noise ratios  
• Fabry- Perot lasers  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Agilent 86120CAt a Glance  
In addition to these measurements, a “p ower bar” is disp layed that  
shows power changes like a traditional analog meter. You can see the  
p ower bar shown in the following figure of the Agilent 86120C’s dis-  
play.  
C A U T IO N  
The input circuitry of the Agilent 86120C can be damaged when total input  
power levels exceed +18 dBm. To prevent input damage, this specified level  
must not be exceeded.  
Print measurement results  
You can get hardcopy results of your measurements by connecting a  
printer to the rear- panel PARALLEL PRINTER PORT connector.  
Program the instrument for automatic measurements  
The Agilent 86120C offers an extensive set of GPIB programming com-  
mands. These commands allow you to p erform automated measure-  
ments on manufacturing production lines and remote sites. Chapter 3,  
“Programming” and Chapter 4, “Programming Commands” provide all  
the information you’ll need to know in order to p rogram the  
Agilent 86120C.  
Display wavelengths as if measured in vacuum or standard air  
Although all measurements are made in air, disp layed results are cor-  
rected for air disp ersion to accurately show wavelength values in vac-  
uum or in “standard air.” To ensure accurate wavelength  
measurements, make sure that you enter the elevation from which you  
will be making measurements as described in Chapter 1, “Getting  
Started”.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Agilent 86120CAt a Glance  
Measurement accuracyits up to you!  
Fiber-optic connectors are easily damaged when connected to dirty or damaged  
cables and accessories. The Agilent 86120Cs front-panel INPUT connector is no  
exception. When you use improper cleaning and handling techniques, you risk  
expensive instrument repairs, damaged cables, and compromised measurements.  
Before you connect any fiber-optic cable to the Agilent 86120C, refer to Cleaning  
Connections for Accurate Measurementson page 2-40.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Considerations  
General Safety Considerations  
This p roduct has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC  
61010- 1, and has been sup p lied in a safe condition. The instruction  
documentation contains information and warnings which must be fol-  
lowed by the user to ensure safe op eration and to maintain the p rod-  
uct in a safe condition.  
Laser Classification: This product is classified according to  
IEC 60825- 1.  
There is no output laser aperture  
The Agilent 86120C does not have an output laser aperture. However, light less  
than 1 nW escapes out of the front-panel OPTICAL INPUT connector. Operator  
maintenance or precautions are not necessary to maintain safety. No controls,  
adjustments, or performance of procedures result in hazardous radiation expo-  
sure.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Considerations  
WA R N IN G  
If this instrument is not used as specified, the protection provided by  
the equipment could be impaired. This instrument must be used in a  
normal condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.  
WA R N IN G  
WA R N IN G  
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified  
personnel. To prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.  
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the Agilent 86120C from mains  
before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water  
to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.  
WA R N IN G  
This is a Safety Class 1 product (provided with protective earth). The  
mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a  
protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor  
inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous.  
Intentional interruption is prohibited.  
WA R N IN G  
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace line fuse only with  
same type and ratings, (type F 6.3A/250V IEC 60127 type 5x20mm). The  
use of other fuses or materials is prohibited. Verify that the value of the  
line-voltage fuse is correct.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Safety Considerations  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
This product complies with Overvoltage Category II and Pollution Degree 2.  
VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: When installing the product in a cabinet, the  
convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient  
temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the maximum operating  
temperature of the product by 4°C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet.  
If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced  
convection must be used.  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument. Failure  
to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause  
instrument damage.  
Do not connect ac power until you have verified the line voltage is correct as  
described in Line Power Requirementson page 1-5. Damage to the equipment  
could result.  
This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply voltage  
is within the specified range.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
The Agilent 86120C—At a Glance iii  
General Safety Considerations vi  
1 Getting Started  
Step 1. Inspect the Shipment 4  
Step 2. Connect the Line-Power Cable 5  
Step 3. Connect a Printer 6  
Step 4. Turn on the Agilent 86120C 7  
Step 5. Enter Your Elevation 8  
Step 6. Select Medium for Wavelength Values 9  
Step 7. Turn Off Wavelength Limiting 10  
Returning the Instrument for Service 11  
2 Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power 3  
Changing the Units and Measurement Rate 12  
Defining Laser-Line Peaks 15  
Measuring Laser Separation 18  
Measuring Laser Drift 22  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios 25  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios with Averaging 29  
Measuring Fabry-Perot (FP) Lasers 31  
Measuring Modulated Lasers 34  
Measuring Total Power Greater than 10 dBm 36  
Calibrating Measurements 37  
Printing Measurement Results 39  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements 40  
3 Programming  
Addressing and Initializing the Instrument 3  
Making Measurements 5  
Monitoring the Instrument 16  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules 23  
Example Programs 28  
Lists of Commands 43  
Contents-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4 Programming Commands  
Common Commands 3  
Measurement Instructions 15  
CALCulate1 Subsystem 25  
CALCulate2 Subsystem 31  
CALCulate3 Subsystem 44  
CONFigure Measurement Instruction 74  
DISPlay Subsystem 75  
FETCh Measurement Instruction 79  
HCOPy Subsystem 80  
MEASure Measurement Instruction 81  
READ Measurement Instruction 82  
SENSe Subsystem 83  
STATus Subsystem 90  
SYSTem Subsystem 97  
TRIGger Subsystem 103  
UNIT Subsystem 107  
5 Performance Tests  
Test 1. Absolute Wavelength Accuracy 3  
Test 2. Sensitivity 4  
Test 3. Polarization Dependence 5  
Test 4. Optical Input Return Loss 6  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity 9  
6 Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Definition of Terms 3  
SpecificationsNORMAL Update Mode 5  
SpecificationsFAST Update Mode 8  
Operating Specifications 11  
Laser Safety Information 12  
Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements 13  
Declaration of Conformity 14  
Product Overview 15  
7 Reference  
Instrument Preset Conditions 2  
Contents-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Menu Maps 4  
Error Messages 11  
Front-Panel Fiber-Optic Adapters 17  
Power Cords 18  
Agilent Technologies Service Offices 18  
Contents-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Step 1. Inspect the Shipment 1- 4  
Step 2. Connect the Line- Power Cable 1- 5  
Step 3. Connect a Printer 1- 6  
Step 4. Turn on the Agilent 86120C 1- 7  
Step 5. Enter Your Elevation 1- 8  
Step 6. Select Medium for Wavelength Values 1- 9  
Step 7. Turn Off Wavelength Limiting 1- 10  
Returning the Instrument for Service 1- 11  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Getting Started  
Getting Started  
The instructions in this chap ter show you how to install your  
Agilent 86120C. You should be able to finish these procedures in about  
ten to twenty minutes. After you’ve comp leted this chap ter, continue  
with Chapter 2, “Making Measurements”.  
Refer to Chapter 6, “Specifications and Regulatory Information” for  
information on operating conditions such as temperature.  
If you should ever need to clean the cabinet, use a damp cloth only.  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
This product has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply voltage is  
within the specified range.  
The front panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains  
supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instrument.  
Install the instrument so that the LINE switch is readily identifiable and is easily  
reached by the operator. The LINE switch or the detachable power cord is the  
instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the mains circuits from the  
mains supply before other parts of the instrument. Alternately, an externally  
installed switch or circuit breaker (which is really identifiable and is easily  
reached by the operator) may be used as a disconnecting device.  
C A U T IO N  
Install the instrument according to the enclosure protection provided. This  
instrument does not protect against the ingress of water. This instrument  
protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Getting Started  
Measurement accuracyits up to you!  
Fiber-optic connectors are easily damaged when connected to dirty or damaged  
cables and accessories. The Agilent 86120Cs front-panel INPUT connector is no  
exception. When you use improper cleaning and handling techniques, you risk  
expensive instrument repairs, damaged cables, and compromised measurements.  
Before you connect any fiber-optic cable to the Agilent 86120C, refer to Cleaning  
Connections for Accurate Measurementson page 2-40.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 1. Inspect the Shipment  
Step 1. Inspect the Shipment  
1 Verify that all system components ordered have arrived by comparing  
the shipping forms to the original purchase order. Inspect all shipping  
containers.  
If your shipment is damaged or incomplete, save the packing materials and notify  
both the shipping carrier and the nearest Agilent Technologies sales and service  
office. Agilent Technologies will arrange for repair or replacement of damaged or  
incomplete shipments without waiting for a settlement from the transportation  
company. Notify the Agilent Technologies customer engineer of any problems.  
2 Make sure that the serial number and options listed on the instrument’s  
rear- p anel label match the serial number and op tions listed on the  
shipping document. The following figure is an example of the rear- panel  
serial number label:  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 2. Connect the Line-Power Cable  
Step 2. Connect the Line- Power Cable  
WA R N IN G  
This is a Safety Class I Product (provided with protective earth). The  
mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a  
protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor  
inside or outside of the instrument is likely to make the instrument  
dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.  
C A U T IO N  
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this instrument.  
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause  
instrument damage.  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
Do not connect ac power until you have verified the line voltage is correct as  
described in the following paragraphs. Damage to the equipment could result.  
This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply voltage  
is within the specified range.  
1 Verify that the line p ower meets the requirements shown in the  
following table.  
Line Power Requirements  
Power:  
max. 70 W  
Voltage:  
Frequency  
max: 110 / 115 / 230 / 240 V~  
50 / 60 Hz  
2 Connect the line- p ower cord to the instrument’s rear- p anel connector.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 3. Connect a Printer  
3 Connect the other end of the line- p ower cord to the p ower recep tacle.  
Various power cables are available to connect the Agilent 86120C to ac  
p ower outlets unique to sp ecific geograp hic areas. The cable ap p rop ri-  
ate for the area to which the Agilent 86120C is originally shipped is  
included with the unit. The cable shipped with the instrument also has  
a right- angle connector so that the Agilent 86120C can be used while  
sitting on its rear feet. You can order additional ac p ower cables for  
use in different geographic areas. Refer to “Power Cords” on  
page 7- 18.  
Step 3. Connect a Printer  
The Agilent 86120C can p rint hardcop ies of measurement results on a  
p rinter. The outp ut is ASCII text. If you don’t have a p rinter, continue  
with “Step 4. Turn on the Agilent 86120C” on p age 1- 7 .  
1 Using a standard parallel printer cable, connect the printer to the  
Agilent 86120C’s rear- panel PARALLEL PRINTER PORT connector.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 4. Turn on the Agilent 86120C  
Step 4. Turn on the Agilent 86120C  
1 Press the front- panel LINE key. After ap proximately 20 seconds, the  
display should look similar to the figure below.  
The front- panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the  
mains supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instru-  
ment.  
2 If the Agilent 86120C fails to turn on p rop erly, consider the following  
possibilities:  
• Is the line fuse good?  
• Does the line socket have power?  
• Is it p lugged into the p rop er ac p ower source?  
If the instrument still fails, return it to Agilent Technologies for repair.  
Refer to “Returning the Instrument for Service” on p age 1- 11  
.
Instrument firmware version  
When the instrument is first turned on, the display briefly shows the instruments  
firmware version number. In the unlikely event that you have a problem with the  
Agilent 86120C, you may need to indicate this number when communicating with  
Agilent Technologies.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 5. Enter Your Elevation  
Step 5. Enter Your Elevation  
In order for your Agilent 86120C to accurately measure wavelengths  
and meet its p ublished sp ecifications, you must enter the elevation  
where you will be performing your measurements.  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the MORE softkey.  
3 Press the CAL softkey.  
4 Press ELEV.  
5 Use the  
and  
softkeys to enter the elevation in meters. Entries  
jump in 500 meter steps from 0 m to 5000 m.  
The elevation value selected with the softkeys must be within 250  
meters of the actual elevation.  
6 Press RETURN to comp lete the entry.  
Converting feet to meters  
If you know your elevation in feet, you can convert this value to meters by using  
the following equation:  
ft  
3,281  
------------  
m =  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 6. Select Medium for Wavelength Values  
Step 6. Select Medium for Wavelength Values  
Because wavelength varies with the material that the light p asses  
through, the Agilent 86120C offers wavelength measurements in two  
mediums: vacuum and standard air.  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the MORE softkey.  
3 Press the CAL softkey.  
4 Make the following selection:  
• Press VACUUM for wavelength readings in a vacuum.  
• Press STD AIR for wavelength readings in standard air.  
5 Press RETURN to comp lete the entry.  
Definition of standard air  
Standard air is defined to have the following characteristics:  
Barometric pressure: 1013 mbar  
Temperature:  
Relative humidity: 0%  
15°C  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Step 7. Turn Off Wavelength Limiting  
Step 7. Turn Off Wavelength Limiting  
The instrument’s Preset key sets the entire Agilent 86120C wavelength  
range of 1270–1650 nm. If a user- defined wavelength range limit was  
set using WL LIM, the following procedure will ensure that responses  
across the full wavelength are measured by returning the instrument to  
its preset state.  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the WL LIM softkey.  
3 Press LIM OFF to remove the limits on wavelength range.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
The instructions in this section show you how to p rop erly return the  
instrument for rep air or calibration. Always call the Agilent Technolo-  
gies Instrument Support Center first to initiate service before returning  
your instrument to a service office. This ensures that the rep air (or  
calibration) can be p rop erly tracked and that your instrument will be  
returned to you as quickly as possible. Call this number regardless of  
where you are located. Refer to “Agilent Technologies Service Offices”  
on page 7- 18 for a list of service offices.  
Agilent Technologies Instrument Support Center +1 (877) 447 7278  
If the instrument is still under warranty or is covered by an Agilent  
Technologies maintenance contract, it will be repaired under the terms  
of the warranty or contract (the warranty is at the front of this man-  
ual). If the instrument is no longer under warranty or is not covered  
by an Agilent Technologies maintenance plan, Agilent Technologies will  
notify you of the cost of the repair after examining the unit.  
When an instrument is returned to a Agilent Technologies service  
office for servicing, it must be adequately p ackaged and have a com-  
plete description of the failure symptoms attached. When describing  
the failure, please be as specific as possible about the nature of the  
problem. Include copies of additional failure information (such as the  
instrument failure settings, data related to instrument failure, and  
error messages) along with the instrument being returned.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
Preparing the instrument for shipping  
1 Write a complete description of the failure and attach it to the  
instrument. Include any specific performance details related to the  
p roblem. The following information should be returned with the  
instrument.  
• Type of service required.  
• Date instrument was returned for repair.  
• Description of the problem:  
Whether problem is constant or intermittent.  
Whether instrument is temperature-sensitive.  
Whether instrument is vibration-sensitive.  
Instrument settings required to reproduce the problem.  
Performance data.  
• Company name and return address.  
• Name and p hone number of technical contact p erson.  
• Model number of returned instrument.  
• Full serial number of returned instrument.  
• List of any accessories returned with instrument.  
2 Cover all front or rear- panel connectors that were originally covered  
when you first received the instrument.  
C A U T IO N  
C A U T IO N  
Cover electrical connectors to protect sensitive components from electrostatic  
damage. Cover optical connectors to protect them from damage due to physical  
contact or dust.  
Instrument damage can result from using packaging materials other than the  
original materials. Never use styrene pellets as packaging material. They do not  
adequately cushion the instrument or prevent it from shifting in the carton. They  
may also cause instrument damage by generating static electricity.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
3 Pack the instrument in the original ship p ing containers. Original  
materials are available through any Agilent Technologies office. Or, use  
the following guidelines:  
• Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of  
damage caused by electrostatic discharge.  
• For instruments weighing less than 54 kg (120 lb), use a double-  
walled, corrugated cardboard carton of 159 kg (350 lb) test strength.  
• The carton must be large enough to allow ap p roximately 7 cm  
(3 inches) on all sides of the instrument for p acking material, and  
strong enough to accommodate the weight of the instrument.  
• Surround the equipment with approximately 7 cm (3 inches) of pack-  
ing material, to protect the instrument and prevent it from moving  
in the carton. If packing foam is not available, the best alternative is  
S.D- 240 Air Cap™ from Sealed Air Corporation (Commerce, Califor-  
nia 90001). Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet filled with air bubbles.  
Use the pink (antistatic) Air Cap™ to reduce static electricity. Wrap-  
p ing the instrument several times in this material will p rotect the  
instrument and p revent it from moving in the carton.  
4 Seal the carton with strong nylon adhesive tap e.  
5 Mark the carton “FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE”.  
6 Retain copies of all shipping papers.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Returning the Instrument for Service  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Measuring Wavelength and Power 2- 3  
Peak WL mode 2-4  
List by WL or Power modes 2-6  
Total power and average wavelength 2-7  
Limiting the wavelength measurement range 2-8  
Measuring broadband devices and chirped lasers 2-9  
Graphical display of optical power spectrum 2-10  
Instrument states 2-11  
Power bar 2-11  
Changing the Units and Measurement Rate 2- 12  
Displayed units 2-12  
Measurement rate 2-13  
Continuous or single measurements 2-14  
Defining Laser-Line Peaks 2- 15  
Measuring Laser Separation 2- 18  
Channel separation 2-19  
Measuring flatness 2-21  
Measuring Laser Drift 2- 22  
Measuring Signal- to- Noise Ratios 2- 25  
Measuring Signal- to- Noise Ratios with Averaging 2- 29  
Measuring Fabry- Perot (FP) Lasers 2- 31  
Measuring Modulated Lasers 2- 34  
Measuring Total Power Greater than 10 dBm 2- 36  
Calibrating Measurements 2- 37  
Printing Measurement Results 2- 39  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements 2- 40  
Making Measurements  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Making Measurements  
Making Measurements  
In this chapter, you’ll learn how to make a variety of fast, accurate  
measurements. As you p erform these measurements, keep in mind the  
following points:  
• 1270–1650 maximum input wavelength range  
• +10 dBm maximum total displayed input power  
• Laser linewidths assumed to be less than 5 GHz  
• If you change the elevation where you will be using your  
Agilent 86120C, refer to “Calibrating Measurements” on page 2- 37.  
• Press the green Preset key to return the Agilent 86120C to its default  
state.  
C A U T IO N  
Do not exceed +18 dBm source power. The Agilent 86120Cs input circuitry can  
be damaged when total input power exceeds 18 dBm. You can measure power  
levels that are greater by adding attenuation and entering a power offset as  
described in To measure total power exceeding 10 dBmon page 2-36.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
This section gives you step - by- step instructions for measuring p eak  
wavelength, average wavelength, peak power, and total input power.  
There are three display modes:  
• Peak wavelength  
• List-by- wavelength or p ower  
• Average wavelength and total power  
If the measured amplitudes are low, clean the front- panel OPTICAL  
INPUT connector.  
This section includes:  
Peak WL mode 2- 4  
List by WL or Power modes 2- 6  
Total p ower and average wavelength 2- 7  
Limiting the wavelength measurement range 2- 8  
Measuring broadband devices and chirped lasers 2- 9  
Graphical display of optical power spectrum 2- 10  
Instrument states 2- 11  
Power bar 2- 11  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
Peak WL mode  
When Peak WL is pressed, the display shows the largest amplitude line  
in the sp ectrum. The word PEAKis shown on the screen. If multip le  
laser lines are present at the input, the number of lines located will be  
shown along the right side of the screen. In peak wavelength mode, the  
Agilent 86120C can measure up to 200 laser lines simultaneously.  
Figure 2-1. Display after “Peak WL” key pressed  
In addition to the digital readouts, there is a p ower bar. It provides a  
convenient analog “meter movement” for tuning laser p ower.  
Although the Peak WL mode shows one signal at a time, softkeys are  
provided that allow you to scroll through and display all the measured  
laser lines. You can scroll through the list according to the wave-  
lengths or powers measured.  
To display peak wavelength and power  
1 Connect the fiber- optic cable to the front- panel OPTICAL INPUT  
connector.  
2 To disp lay the p eak wavelength and p ower, do one of the following:  
• Press the green Preset key.  
• Press Peak WL.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
3 To move the cursor to view other signals, p ress:  
PREV WL to select next (p revious) shorter wavelength.  
NEXT WL to select next longer wavelength.  
PEAK to signal with greatest p ower.  
PREV PK to select next lower p ower signal.  
NEXT PK to select next higher p ower signal.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
List by WL or Power modes  
In the list- by- wavelength or list- by- power modes, the measurements of  
five laser lines can be disp layed at any one time. Use the  
and  
softkeys to move the cursor through the list of signals; the list can  
contain up to 200 entries. Press the SELECT key, and the display  
changes to p eak wavelength mode with the signal at the cursor dis-  
played.  
Annotation in the upper right corner of the display indicates whether  
the signals are ordered according to wavelength (BY WL) or power ( BY  
PWR). The cursor shows the currently selected laser line. As you scroll  
through the resp onses, the current p osition of the selection cursor is  
shown along the screen’s right side.  
Figure 2-2. Display after List by WLkey pressed  
Also notice that p ower bars grap hically show the relative p ower levels  
between laser lines.  
To display multiple laser lines  
1 Connect the fiber- optic cable to the front- panel OPTICAL INPUT  
connector.  
2 Press the green Preset key.  
3 Press List by WL to display the laser lines from the shortest wavelength  
to the longest wavelength.  
4 Press List by Power to display the laser lines in order of decreasing  
amplitudes.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
Total power and average wavelength  
In the third available disp lay mode, the Agilent 86120C disp lays the  
average wavelength as shown in the following figure. The disp layed  
power level is the total input power to the instrument. It is the sum of  
the powers of each laser line; it is not a measure of the average power  
level of the laser lines.  
The following equation shows how individual wavelengths of laser lines  
are summed together to obtain the average wavelength value:  
n
P λ  
i
i
i = 1  
--------------------  
λ
=
avg  
n
P
i
i = 1  
where,  
n is the number of laser lines included in the average.  
Pi is the peak power of an individual laser line. Power units are in Watts (linear).  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
The following equation shows how individual p owers of laser lines are  
summed together to obtain the total power value:  
n
P
=
P
i
total  
i = 1  
where,  
n is the number of laser lines included in the measurement.  
Pi is the peak power of an individual laser line. Power units are in Watts (linear).  
To display average wavelength and total power  
• Press the Avg WL key.  
Limiting the wavelength measurement range  
The wavelength range of measurement can be limited with the wave-  
length limit function. Both start and stop wavelengths can be chosen.  
The units of wavelength start and stop are the same as the currently  
selected wavelength units. If wavelength units are later changed, the  
start and stop wavelength units will change accordingly. Note that a  
start wavelength limit in nm will become a stop wavelength limit if  
THz or cm-1 is chosen. See “To change the units of measure” on  
page 2- 12.  
The graphical display uses the start and stop wavelength values to plot  
the power spectrum, whether the wavelength limit function is on or  
off.  
Preset turns wavelength limiting on. Only responses that are within the  
boundaries of the chosen start and stop wavelength limits are mea-  
sured. This includes Peak WL, List by WL, and List by Power modes.  
To limit the wavelength range  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the WL LIM softkey.  
3 Press the STARTWL softkey to adjust the start wavelength value.  
4 Press the STOP WL softkey to adjust the stop wavelength value.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
Measuring broadband devices and chirped lasers  
When first turned on (or the green Preset key is p ressed), the  
Agilent 86120C is configured to measure narrowband devices such as  
DFB lasers and modes of FP lasers. If you plan to measure broadband  
devices such as LEDs, op tical filters, and chirped lasers, use the  
Setup  
menu first to reconfigure the instrument. When broadband devices are  
selected, the display shows the BROAD annotation on the screen.  
The measurement algorithm for broadband devices determines the  
wavelength based upon the center- of- mass of the power spectrum. The  
peak excursion function is used to determine the value of the integra-  
tion limits. Care must be taken to ensure that the integration limits  
are above any noise. This is especially true when measuring devices  
with slop ing noise floors, like an EDFA amp lifier. For more informa-  
tion on peak excursion, refer to “Defining Laser- Line Peaks” on p age  
2- 15.  
Instrument specifications apply when the Agilent 86120C is configured  
to measure narrowband devices. Specifications do not apply when the  
instrument is configured to measure wideband devices.  
To measure broadband devices  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press MORE twice, and then the DEVICE softkey.  
3 Press the BROAD softkey.  
To return to measuring narrowband devices, p ress NARROW.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
Graphical display of optical power spectrum  
A graphical display of optical power versus wavelength is shown from  
the start wavelength value to the stop wavelength value. The start  
wavelength value is shown in the up p er- left corner of the grap hical  
disp lay, and the stop wavelength value is shown in the up p er- right  
corner of the grap hical disp lay. The p ower scale is a fixed dB scale,  
with +10 dBm at the display top and –53 dBm at the display bottom.  
The p ower scale is not affected by the Power Offset value. In most  
cases, the noise floor will be visible if the total inp ut power is greater  
than about –5 dBm.  
The Agilent 86120C graphical display.  
The Peak Threshold value is disp layed as a dotted line. All p eaks  
above this dotted line are displayed in the List by Wavelength and List  
by Power modes. All p eaks below this line are not disp layed. Adjust  
the Peak Threshold value with the Setup key, and the THRSHLD softkey.  
The wavelength limit start and stop wavelength values are used for the  
graphical display even if the wavelength limit function is off.  
The graphical display cannot be printed.  
To see the graphical display  
1 Press the List by WL or List by Power key.  
2 Press the GRAPH softkey.  
3 To exit the graphical display, press any softkey.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Wavelength and Power  
Instrument states  
Four different instrument states can be saved and recalled at a later  
time. The actual instrument conditions that are saved are identical to  
those saved from the p revious state after p ower is turned on. These  
conditions are shown in Table 5- 22onp age 7- 2 . If drift measurements  
or an ap p lication (such as signal-to- noise) is on when an instrument  
state is saved, it is off when that state is recalled.  
To save an instrument state  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the SAV/RCL softkey.  
3 Press the SAVE softkey.  
4 Press one of the four SAVE softkeys to save the instrument state.  
To recall an instrument state  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the SAV/RCL softkey.  
3 Press the RECALL softkey.  
4 Press one of the four RCL softkeys to recall an instrument state.  
Power bar  
To control the power bar  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press MORE twice, and then PWR BAR.  
3 Press BAR ON to disp lay the p ower bar, and p ress BAR OFF to hide the  
power bar display.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Changing the Units and Measurement Rate  
Changing the Units and Measurement Rate  
This section includes step - by-step instructions for changing the units  
and measurement rate.  
This section includes:  
Displayed units 2- 12  
Measurement rate 2- 13  
Continuous or single measurements 2- 14  
Displayed units  
As described below, it’s easy to change the wavelength and amp litude  
units. You can choose between the following units:  
Table 2-1. Available Units  
Wavelength (Frequency)  
Power  
nm  
dBm  
mW  
cm1  
THz  
µW  
To change the units of measure  
1 Press Setup.  
2 Press the MORE softkey.  
3 Press the UNITS softkey.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Changing the Units and Measurement Rate  
4 Press WL and select one of the following units. Then, press RETURN to  
complete your selection:  
NM for nanometers  
THZ for Tera Hertz  
CM –1 for wave number  
5 Press POWER and select one of the following units:  
DBM for decibels relative to a milliwatt  
MW for milliwatts  
UW for microwatts  
Measurement rate  
Under normal op eration, the Agilent 86120C makes a measurement  
and disp lays the results about once every second. It is in this normal  
update mode that maximum accuracy and wavelength resolution are  
achieved. However, should a faster up date be desired, for examp le  
when real- time feedback is required to tune a laser to its designated  
channel, the Agilent 86120C can be set to up date ap p roximately two  
times p er second. This reduces both wavelength resolution and accu-  
racy but can be beneficial in some ap p lications.  
The instrument resolution in NORMAL update mode is 7 GHz (0.06 nm  
at 1550 nm). This resolution is useful when measuring closely sp aced  
laser lines carrying data at up to 5 Gb/s rates.  
The instrument resolution in FAST update mode is 14 GHz (0.12 nm at  
1550 nm). This resolution is useful when measuring laser lines carry-  
ing data at up to 10 Gb/s rates.  
NOTE  
When measuring laser lines carrying data at 10 Gb/s in NORMAL update mode,  
the instrument resolution is less than the modulation bandwidth of the laser lines.  
In this case, the displayed power of the laser lines will be less than the actual  
power by approximately 1 dB. This power offset can be calculated by comparing  
the displayed power to that measured by a power meter. Then, the power offset  
can be entered, by pressing Setup, MORE, CAL, PWR OFS, to display the correct  
power.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Changing the Units and Measurement Rate  
To change the measurement speed  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the MORE softkey.  
3 Press the UPDATE softkey.  
4 Select either NORMAL or FAST.  
Continuous or single measurements  
The Agilent 86120C continuously measures the input spectrum at the  
front- panel OPTICAL INPUT connector. Whenever measurements are  
being acquired, an asterisk (*) is displayed in the display’s upper- right  
corner. When you switch between normal and fast up date modes, the  
rate that the asterisk blinks changes.  
You can specify that the instrument perform a measurement only when  
the front-panel Single key is pressed. This is the single- acquisition  
measurement mode, and it is useful for capturing and preserving data.  
After cap turing the data, you can disp lay it using many of the p roce-  
dures included in this chap ter. You can return to continuous measure-  
ment mode at any time by p ressing the  
Cont key.  
To select single measurement acquisition  
• Press the Single key.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Defining Laser-Line Peaks  
Defining Laser-Line Peaks  
The Agilent 86120C uses two rules to identify valid laser- line peaks.  
Understanding these rules is essential to getting the most from your  
measurements. For example, these rules allow you to “hide” AM mod-  
ulation sidebands or locate laser lines with small amplitudes.  
In order to identify a laser line, the laser- line must meet both of the  
following rules:  
• Power must be greater than the power established by the peak threshold  
limit  
• Power must rise and then fall by at least the peak excursion value  
In addition, the inp ut wavelength range can be limited as described in  
this section.  
Peak threshold  
limit  
The peak threshold limit is set by subtracting the peak threshold value  
from the p ower of the largest laser line. So, if the largest laser line is  
2 dBm and the peak threshold value is 10 dB, the peak threshold limit  
is –8 dBm (8 dBm = 2 dBm 10 dB ) . You can set the peak threshold  
value between 0 to 40 dB.  
The peak threshold’s default value is 10 dB. This ensures that any  
modulated signals being measured are not confused with their AM  
sidebands. For unmodulated lasers, or Fabry- Perot lasers, it may be  
desirable to increase this threshold to look for responses that are more  
than 10 dB from the p eak.  
Peak threshold can be used to suppress spurious signals. For example,  
a laser that is amplitude modulated in the audio frequency range can  
cause spurious wavelengths to be displayed below and above the cor-  
rect wavelength. The p ower of these sp urious wavelengths is below  
that of the correct wavelength. These sp urious signals can be elimi-  
nated by decreasing Peak threshold from its Preset value.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Defining Laser-Line Peaks  
Peak excursion  
The peak excursion defines the rise and fall in amplitude that must  
take p lace in order for a laser line to be recognized. The rise and fall  
can be out of the noise, or in the case of two closely sp aced signals,  
out of the filter skirts of the adjacent signal. The p eak excursion’s  
default value is 15 dB. Any laser line that rises by 15 dB and then  
falls by 15 dB passes the rule. You can set the peak excursion value  
from 1 to 30 dB.  
Examples of valid In the following figure, three laser lines are identified: resp onses 1, 3  
and invalid signals and 4. Resp onse 2 is not identified because it is below the p eak  
threshold. The portion of each signal that is within the peak excursion  
limits is shown in bold lines.  
Because of the peak excursion rule, responses 4 and 5 are identified  
as one laser line—the minimum p oint between 4 and 5 does not drop  
to the p eak excursion limit. This resp onse has the highest p ower  
shown, which is peak 4.  
Whenever the peak threshold limit or peak excursion value is changed,  
the new limits are applied to the current displayed measurements even  
if the instrument is in the Single measurement mode.  
To define laser- line peaks  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the THRSHLD softkey.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Defining Laser-Line Peaks  
3 Press PX EXC, and enter the peak excursion value. Use the  
softkey  
to select the digit that requires editing. Use the  
change the value.  
and  
softkeys to  
The peak excursion value can range from 1 to 30 dB. The default value  
is 15 dB.  
4 Press RETURN.  
5 Press PK THLD and then enter the peak threshold value.  
The peak threshold value can range from 0 to 40 dB. Setting this value  
to 0 dB ensures that only the peak wavelength is identified. The default  
value is 10 dB.  
Pressing the green PRESET key changes the peak excursion and peak  
threshold values to their default settings. It also turns wavelength  
range limiting on. Turning the Agilent 86120C’s power off and then on  
does not change these settings.  
If too many lines are identified  
If the following message is displayed, too many laser lines have been identified:  
E15 MAX NUMBER OF SIGNALS FOUND  
The maximum number of laser lines that the instrument can measure is 200. If  
this message appears, decrease the peak threshold value, increase the peak  
excursion value, or decrease the wavelength range of operation with the WL  
LIM ....START WL and STOP WL functions.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Separation  
Measuring Laser Separation  
It is often imp ortant to measure the wavelength and p ower sep aration  
between multiple laser lines. This is especially true in wavelength-divi-  
sion- multiplexed (WDM) systems where channel spacing must be  
adhered to. The Agilent 86120C can disp lay the wavelength and amp li-  
tude of any laser line relative to another. In fact, the following types of  
relative measurements can be made compared to the reference:  
• Relative wavelength, absolute power  
• Relative power, absolute wavelength  
• Relative wavelength and p ower  
This section includes:  
Channel separation 2- 19  
Measuring flatness 2- 21  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Separation  
Channel separation  
Sup p ose that you want to measure sep aration on a system having the  
sp ectrum shown in the following figure.  
The Agilent 86120C displays separation on this spectrum as shown in  
the following figure. Notice that the 1541.747 nm laser line is selected  
as the reference. It is shown in absolute units. The wavelengths and  
powers of the remaining responses are shown relative to this refer-  
ence. For example, the first response is 2.596 nm below the reference.  
To determine channel spacing, simply read the relative wavelength  
measurement of the laser lines immediately p receding and following  
the reference. Use the  
,
, and SELECT softkeys to change the ref-  
erence laser line and read the channel sp acing between each channel.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Separation  
To measure channel separation  
1 Press the front- panel Preset key.  
2 Press List by WL.  
3 Press the Delta On key.  
Use the Off key to turn off the measurement.  
4 Select the typ e of sep aration to observe:  
WL displays channel separation.  
WL / PWR displays both channel separation and differences in  
power.  
5 Use the  
and  
softkeys to select the reference laser line.  
6 Press SELECT.  
Press SELECT at any time to select a new reference. Press RESET at any  
time to turn off the delta calculation.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Separation  
Measuring flatness  
You can use relative power measurements to measure flatness (pre-  
emphasis) in a WDM system. Simply select one carrier as the reference  
and measure the remaining carriers relative to the reference level. The  
p ower differences rep resent the system flatness.  
Press RESET to turn off the delta calculations so that all responses are  
shown in absolute wavelength and p owers.  
To measure flatness  
1 Press the front- panel Preset key.  
2 Press List by Power.  
This lists the inp ut signals by p ower with the largest resp onse listed  
first.  
3 Press the Delta On key.  
4 Select PWR.  
5 Use the  
and  
softkeys to select the first laser line.  
6 Press SELECT.  
7 Since the largest power signal is the reference, the relative power  
measurements for the other responses shows system flatness.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Drift  
Measuring Laser Drift  
In this section, you’ll learn how the Agilent 86120C can be used to  
monitor drift (changes to a laser’s wavelength and amplitude over  
time). Drift is measured simultaneously for every laser line that is  
identified at the input. The Agilent 86120C keeps track of each laser  
line’s initial, current, minimum, and maximum values and disp lays  
their differences relative to itself. This allows the Agilent 86120C to be  
used for laser transmitter evaluation, burn- in, or develop ment. In  
addition, you can monitor system performance over time, temperature,  
or other condition.  
The following display shows power and wavelength drift measured on  
five laser lines. The DRIFT annotation, item 1, tells you that drift mea-  
surements are being performed. The current relative drift values for  
wavelength and p ower are shown in items 2 and 3, resp ectively.  
Item 4 indicates the absolute reference values for the laser line indi-  
cated by the cursor  
measurement starts.  
. The reference values are measured before the  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Drift  
You can restart the drift measurement at any time by p ressing the  
RESET softkey. All minimum and maximum values are reset to the ref-  
erence values, and the Agilent 86120C begins to monitor drift from the  
current laser line values. Move the cursor up and down the listing to  
see the reference wavelength and power of each laser line.  
If measurement updating stops or the values become blanked  
If, in the middle of a measurement, the number of laser lines present changes, the  
measurement stops until the original number of lines returns. Youll notice that a  
CLEAR softkey appears and one of the following message is displayed:  
E46 NUM LINES < NUM REFS  
E47 NUM LINES > NUM REFS  
To view the data measured before the conditions changed, press CLEAR and  
then MAX-MIN. Notice that the measurement acquisition is changed from con-  
tinuous to single.  
To restart testing, press CLEAR, the CONT key, and then RESET to use the new  
number of lines as the reference. Pressing CONT restarts continuous measure-  
ment acquisition. Or, you can restore the original number of lines on the input  
so that the drift measurement can continue.  
To measure drift  
1 Press the front- panel Preset key.  
2 Press Peak WL, List by WL, or List by Power to select the display style for  
observing drift.  
3 Press Appls and then DRIFT.  
Pressing DRIFT sets the current laser- line values as the reference from  
which to compare all drift.  
4 Press MAX-MIN for the desired type of drift measurement as described  
in the following p aragrap hs:  
Display shows the current values of laser lines relative to the  
wavelength and power values measured when the test was  
begun or the RESET softkey was pressed.  
Display shows absolute maximum values since the drift  
measurement was started. This measurement gives the longest  
wavelength and greatest power measured. The laser line of  
interest may have since drifted to a lesser value. Note that the  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Laser Drift  
maximum wavelength and maximum power may not have  
occurred simultaneously.  
Display shows absolute minimum values since the drift  
measurement was started. This measurement gives the shortest  
wavelength and smallest power measured. The laser line of  
interest may have since drifted to a greater value. Note that the  
minimum wavelength and minimum power may not have  
occurred simultaneously.  
Display shows the total drift from the reference since the drift  
measurement was started. Values represent the minimum  
wavelength and power drift values subtracted from the  
maximum drift values.  
5 In the List by WL and List by Power displays, use the  
and  
softkeys  
to view the reference values (wavelength and power values of each laser  
line before the test was started).  
During the measurement, you can change the display mode to Peak WL,  
List by WL, List by Power, or Avg WL. When List by WL or List by Power is  
selected, the signal list is sorted by reference values and not by the  
current, maximum, or minimum values.  
To restart the drift measurements, p ress RESET. This resets the refer-  
ence values.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios  
Signal- to- noise measurements provide a direct indication of system  
performance. Signal- to- noise measurements are especially important in  
WDM systems because there is a direct relation between signal- to-  
noise and bit error rate. The Agilent 86120C displays signal- to- noise  
measurements in the third column. For example, the selected signal in  
the following figure has a signal- to-noise ratio of 30.0 dB.  
Signal-to-noise display.  
During a signal- to- noise measurement, the absolute p ower of the car-  
rier, in dBm, is comp ared to the absolute p ower of the noise at the  
carrier wavelength. See the following figure. The noise p ower at the  
carrier must be determined by interpolation because the carrier, in  
most cases, can not or should not be turned off.  
You can select one of two methods used to determine the wavelength  
where the noise is measured: automatic interpolation or a user- entered  
wavelength. In the figure above, notice that “S/N AUTO” is displayed  
to indicate that automatic interpolation is selected.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios  
Location of noise measurements  
Automatic  
When the signal- to- noise “auto” function is selected, the  
interpolation  
Agilent 86120C first determines the proximity of any adjacent signal. If  
the next closest signal is 200 GHz (approximately 1.6 nm at 1550 nm)  
away from the signal of interest, then the noise p ower is measured  
half way between the two channels and an equal distance to the other  
side of the signal of interest. See points Pn1 and Pn2 in the following  
figure.  
If the closest signal is more than 200 GHz from the signal of interest,  
or if there is no other signals p resent, then the noise p ower is mea-  
sured at 100 GHz on either side of the signal of interest. The two mea-  
sured noise power levels are then averaged to estimate the noise  
p ower level at the signal wavelength. The noise p ower measurements  
use linear interpolation to estimate the noise power level at the signal  
of interest’s wavelength.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios  
Automatic interpolation  
User- entered  
wavelength  
When the signal- to- noise “user” function is selected, the  
Agilent 86120C uses only one wavelength to measure the noise power  
for all signals. This wavelength is set by the user and all signals are  
compared to the noise level at this wavelength to determine their cor-  
responding signal- to- noise ratios.  
Noise bandwidth  
When measuring noise power, the Agilent 86120C must account for the  
noise bandwidth used during the measurement. Because noise band-  
width varies with measurement bandwidth (a wide bandwidth allows  
more noise to the Agilent 86120C’s detector than a narrow bandwidth),  
the Agilent 86120C normalizes all noise power measurements to a  
bandwidth of 0.1 nm. The annotation 0.1 nm is displayed to show  
that the noise bandwidth is being normalized to a 0.1 nm bandwidth.  
Repetitive data formats  
The Agilent 86120C signal-to-noise application works best when the laser being  
tested is not modulated, or modulated with non-repetitive data formats. With  
repetitive data formats, such as PRBS data and SONET formats, there is signifi-  
cant low-frequency amplitude modulation of the laser. This modulation raises the  
noise floor of the Agilent 86120C significantly. The signal-to-noise measured can  
be limited to about 15 dB while measuring lasers modulated by repetitive data for-  
mats. For improved performance when the laser is modulated with repetitive data  
formats, use the Signal-to-Noise with Averaging application.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios  
To measure signal- to- noise  
1 Press the front- panel Preset key.  
2 Press List by WL or List by Power.  
3 Press Appls and then S/N.  
4 To select the wavelength reference for measuring the noise, do the  
following steps:  
a Press WL REF, and  
press AUTO to let the instrument interpolate the wavelength,  
or  
press USER to select the last wavelength manually entered.  
b If you chose USER, you can specify the wavelength by pressing USER  
WL. Use the  
the and  
softkey to select the digit that requires editing. Use  
softkeys to change the value.  
c Press RETURN.  
5 While the signal- to- noise measurements are displayed, you can press  
PEAK anytime to select the signal with the highest p ower.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios with Averaging  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios with  
Averaging  
When the lasers being measured are modulated, especially with repeti-  
tive data formats such as SONET or PRBS, the noise floor is raised.  
Averaging reduces the noise floor and allows an improvement of  
greater than 10 dB in a signal- to- noise measurement. In general, aver-  
aging will decrease the noise floor caused by modulation until the true  
optical noise level is reached. The displayed signal- to- noise will  
improve with each average until the true optical noise level is reached,  
and then the displayed signal- to- noise will remain approximately con-  
stant. If, however, the true signal- to- noise is below the instrument  
sensitivity of ap p roximately 40 dB (in a 0.1 nm noise bandwidth), it  
will not be measured.  
Averaging can also imp rove the accuracy of measuring signal- to- noise  
of unmodulated lasers.  
Signal-to-noise with averaging display.  
Averaging is p erformed on the noise, not on the wavelength or p ower  
of the laser signals.  
The signal- to- noise with averaging measurement uses the automatic  
interpolation method to determine the wavelengths where the noise is  
measured. See "Measuring Signal- to- Noise Ratios" for a descrip tion of  
automatic interp olation. There is no user- entered wavelength selection  
in signal- to- noise with averaging.  
During a signal- to- noise with averaging measurement, the disp lay indi-  
cates  
S/N A xx, where A indicates averaging and xx is the number of  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Signal-to-Noise Ratios with Averaging  
averages taken so far. The maximum number of averages is 900, the  
minimum number of averages is 10, and the default (Preset) value is  
100 averages. A measurement with 100 averages takes about 2 minutes  
to comp lete. When the measurement is comp lete, the instrument  
switches to single measurement mode. Then, pressing the Cont key will  
start a comp letely new measurement. During a measurement and  
before the number of averages has been reached, pressing the Single  
key will stop the measurement. Then, p ressing the Cont key will con-  
tinue with the current measurement.  
While making a signal- to- noise with averaging measurement, the num-  
ber of averages can be changed. As long as the new number of aver-  
ages is greater than the number of averages taken so far, the  
measurement continues. If the new number of averages selected is less  
than the number of averages taken so far, the measurement stop s and  
the instrument switches to single measurement mode. Then, pressing  
the Cont key will start a comp letely new measurement.  
Noise bandwidth  
affects  
measurement  
When measuring noise power, the Agilent 86120C must account for the  
noise bandwidth used during the measurement. Because noise band-  
width varies with measurement bandwidth (a wide bandwidth allows  
more noise to the Agilent 86120C’s detector than a narrow bandwidth),  
the Agilent 86120C normalizes all noise power measurements to a  
bandwidth of 0.1 nm. The annotation 0.10 nm is displayed to show  
that the noise bandwidth is being normalized to a 0.1 nm bandwidth.  
To measure signal- to- noise with averaging  
1 Press the front panel Preset key.  
2 Press List by WL or List by Power.  
3 Press Appl's and then S/N AVG.  
4 To change the number of averages, press NUM AVG. The default (Preset)  
value is 100.  
5 To stop the measurement at the current number of averages shown,  
press the Single key. Then p ress the Cont key to continue the present  
measurement.  
6 When the measurement is comp lete, the instrument will switch to the  
single measurement mode and stop.  
7 To make a new measurement, press the Cont key.  
8 To exit, p ress the EXIT softkey, then press the Cont key for continuous  
measurement.  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Fabry-Perot (FP) Lasers  
Measuring Fabry-Perot (FP) Lasers  
The Agilent 86120C can perform several measurements on Fabry- Perot  
lasers including FWHM and mode sp acing. The disp lay shows the mea-  
surement results in the selected wavelength and amplitude units. In  
addition, the mode spacing measurement always shows results in fre-  
quency as well as the selected wavelength units. Refer to “Displayed  
units” on page 2- 12 to learn how to change the units. The number of  
laser lines included in the measurement results is also listed as shown  
in the following figure.  
To characterize a Fabry- Perot laser  
1 Press Appls.  
2 Press FP TEST to measure the Fabry-Perot laser’s characteristics.  
If you want to stop the up dating of measurement data with each  
sweep, press Single. Because Fabry- Perot lasers are sensitive to reflec-  
tions it is good measurement p ractice to p lace an op tical isolator or  
attenuator between the laser and the Agilent 86120C.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Fabry-Perot (FP) Lasers  
Measurement  
FWHM  
Description  
FWHM (full width at half maximum) describes the spectral  
width of the half-power points of the laser, assuming a  
continuous, Gaussian power distribution. The half-power points  
are those where the power spectral density is one-half that of  
the peak amplitude of the computed Gaussian curve.  
FWHM = 2.355 σ  
where, σ is sigma as defined below.  
MEAN  
The wavelength representing the center of mass of selected  
peaks. The power and wavelength of each spectral component  
are used to calculate the mean wavelength.  
N
λi  
MeanWavelength =  
Pi  
Σ
P°  
i =1  
where, Po is total power as defined in this section.  
MODE  
PEAK  
The mean wavelength spacing between the individual spectral  
components of the laser.  
The power level of the peak spectral component of the laser.  
The wavelength of the peak spectral component.  
SIGMA  
An rms calculation of the spectral width of the laser based on a  
Gaussian distribution. The power and wavelength of each  
spectral component is used to calculate mean wavelength.  
N
i λ)2  
---------------------  
σ =  
Pi  
Σ
Po  
i = 1  
where:  
λ is the mean wavelength as defined above.  
Pi is the power of a single peak.  
Po is total power as defined in this section.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Fabry-Perot (FP) Lasers  
PWR  
The summation of the power in each of the selected peaks, or  
modes, that satisfy the peak-excursion and peak-threshold  
criteria.  
N
Total Power =  
Pi  
Σ
i =1  
The peak excursion and peak threshold settings define the laser modes  
included in the measurement. Because the default peak excursion value  
is 10 dB, measurement results normally include all laser modes within  
10 dB of the peak response. Use the PK THLD softkey to change the  
number of laser modes used in the measurements. Refer to “Defining  
Laser- Line Peaks” on page 2- 15 for information on the peak threshold  
and peak excursion settings.  
The peak excursion value (in dB) can also be used to determine which  
side modes are included in the measurements. To be accep ted, each  
trace p eak must rise, and then fall, by at least the p eak excursion  
value about a given spectral component. Setting the peak-excursion  
value too high results in failure to include the smaller resp onses near  
the noise floor. Setting the value too low may cause unwanted  
responses, including noise spikes, to be identified. Use PK EXC to  
change the peak excursion value.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Modulated Lasers  
Measuring Modulated Lasers  
A laser that is amp litude modulated at low frequencies (for examp le,  
modulated in the audio frequency range) can cause sp urious wave-  
lengths to be displayed below and above the correct wavelength. The  
power of these spurious wavelengths is below that of the correct  
wavelength. These spurious signals can be eliminated by decreasing the  
peak threshold. Refer to “Defining Laser-Line Peaks” on p age 2- 15  
.
Even when the laser is amplitude modulated, the correct wavelength  
and power is displayed.  
The sp urious wavelengths caused by low frequency amp litude modula-  
tion will be located above and below the correct wavelength by the fol-  
lowing wavelength spacing:  
spacing = 6×1010Fλ2  
where F is the modulation frequency in Hz, and λ is the correct wave-  
length in nm. For examp le, an amp litude modulation of 10 kHz on a  
1550 nm laser will p roduce sp urious wavelengths sp aced by 15 nm  
from the correct wavelength, and the sp urious wavelengths will be at  
1535 and 1565 nm.  
Low frequency (10 kHz) AM modulation graph showing rounded sideband spurs.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Modulated Lasers  
The graphical display is useful for locating these spurious wavelengths.  
Their amp litude will be below that of the correct wavelength and they  
will be broad, rounded p eaks comp ared to the sharp p eak of the cor-  
rect wavelength. Use the Peak Threshold function to p lace the dotted  
line above the spurious peaks so they will not be displayed in the List  
by WL or List by Power table.  
A laser modulated at high frequency (in the RF or microwave range)  
can also cause sp urious wavelengths to be disp layed, esp ecially when  
the modulation is of a rep etitive nature such as that of PRBS or  
SONET digital formats. In general, no spurious wavelengths will be dis-  
played using preset instrument conditions. The preset condition  
includes peak excursion, peak threshold, and wavelength range limit-  
ing. However, increasing peak threshold can cause spurious wave-  
lengths to be displayed.  
Even when the laser being tested is modulated with repetitive formats,  
the carrier’s correct wavelength and p ower is disp layed; the wave-  
length and p ower of the sp urious sidebands are incorrect.  
The grap hical disp lay is useful to see the effects of high frequency  
modulation. Without modulation, the noise floor is typically 45 dB  
below the laser power. In general, high frequency modulation will raise  
the noise floor to about 25 dB below the laser p ower. The noise floor  
is typ ically flat, or white. The actual level of the noise floor dep ends  
on the typ e of data format and the data rate.  
PRBS modulation graph showing raised noise floor.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Measuring Total Power Greater than 10 dBm  
Measuring Total Power Greater than 10 dBm  
The maximum total power that can be measured by the Agilent 86120C  
is 10 dBm. However, with the addition of an external attenuator, more  
power can be app lied. This may be necessary at the transmit end of a  
wavelength- division- multiplexed system where large signal levels are  
p resent. By entering an amp litude offset equal to the amount of atten-  
uation at the instrument’s input, accurate amplitude measurements are  
shown on the disp lay. Additional amp lification can also be accounted  
for.  
C A U T IO N  
The maximum total input power that can be applied to the Agilent 86120C  
before damage occurs is 18 dBm. The maximum total input power that can be  
measured is 10 dBm.  
To measure total power exceeding 10 dBm  
1 Connect an optical attenuator between the front- panel OPTICAL INPUT  
connector and the fiber- optic cable.  
The attenuator must reduce the total input power to the Agilent 86120C  
so that it is below +10 dBm.  
2 Press Setup, MORE, CAL, and then PWR OFS.  
Notice that the PWR OFSannotation ap p ears on the screen to indicate  
an offset is ap p lied.  
3 Use the  
4 Use the  
softkey to select the digit that requires editing.  
and softkeys to change the value.  
Power offset values are added to the disp lay p ower readings. For  
examp le, if you p laced a 10 dB attenuator on the front- p anel connec-  
tor, enter a p ower offset value of +10 dB. Negative values can also be  
entered if you connect an amp lifier instead of an attenuator.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Calibrating Measurements  
Calibrating Measurements  
The wavelength of light changes depending on the material that the  
light is p assing through. To disp lay meaningful wavelength measure-  
ments, the Agilent 86120C performs two steps:  
1 Measures the wavelength in air.  
2 Converts the wavelength to show values in either a vacuum or “standard  
air”.  
For examp le, a laser line with a wavelength of 1550.000 nm in a vac-  
uum would have a wavelength in standard air of 1549.577 nm.  
Because all measurements made inside the Agilent 86120C are p er-  
formed in air, the density of air, due to elevation, affects the wave-  
length results. You must calibrate the Agilent 86120C by entering the  
elevation. Elevations from 0 to 5000 meters can be entered. The eleva-  
tion correction is immediately applied to the current measurement  
even if the instrument is in the single measurement acquisition mode.  
Annotation on the display shows the current calibration elevation in  
meters and whether the wavelength measurements are shown for a  
vacuum (VAC) or standard air (STD AIR).  
If you select frequency instead of wavelength measurements, switching  
between vacuum and standard air will not affect the measurement  
results. This is because the frequency of an op tical signal does not  
change in different mediums—only the wavelength changes.  
Definition of standard air  
Standard air is defined to have the following characteristics:  
Barometric pressure: 1013 mbar  
Temperature:  
Relative humidity:  
15°C  
0%  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Calibrating Measurements  
To enter the elevation  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the MORE softkey.  
3 Press the CAL softkey.  
4 Press ELEV.  
5 Use the  
and  
softkeys to enter the elevation in meters. Entries  
jump in 500 meter steps from 0 m to 5000 m.  
In order for the Agilent 86120C to meet its published specifications, the  
elevation value selected with the softkeys must be within 250 meters of  
the actual elevation.  
6 Press RETURN to comp lete the entry.  
Converting feet to meters  
If you know your elevation in feet, you can convert this value to meters by using  
the following equation:  
ft  
3,281  
------------  
m =  
To select the medium for light  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press the MORE softkey.  
3 Press the CAL softkey, and make the following selection:  
• Press VACUUM for wavelengths in a vacuum.  
• Press STD AIR for wavelengths in standard air.  
4 Press RETURN to comp lete the entry.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Printing Measurement Results  
Printing Measurement Results  
Measurement results can be sent directly to a printer. Simply connect  
a compatible printer to the rear- panel PARALLEL PRINTER PORT con-  
nector. The output is ASCII text. An example of a compatible printer is  
Hewlett- Packard®’s LaserJet1 series p rinter. Be sure to use a p arallel  
p rinter cable to connect the p rinter.  
The p rinter outp ut is not a cop y of the disp lay. Rather, it is a listing  
of all signals present at the input (up to 200). The measurement values  
printed dep end on the settings of the instrument when the Print key is  
pressed. The following is an example of a typical printout:  
Agilent 86120C SER US39400020  
Firmware Ver. 1.000  
List By Wavelength  
8 Lines  
Power Offset 0.0 dB  
Vacuum  
Elevation 0 Meters  
Update Normal  
Peak Excursion 15 dB  
Peak Threshold 10 dB  
Device Narrow  
Input  
Wavelength  
Power  
1280.384nm  
1281.473  
1282.569  
1283.651  
1284.752  
1285.840  
1286.944  
1288.034  
-16.97dBm  
-13.14  
-13.92  
-13.34  
-11.69  
-8.11  
-10.38  
-14.65  
To create a hardcopy  
1 Connect the printer to the Agilent 86120C’s rear- panel PARALLEL  
PRINTER PORT connector.  
2 Press Print. You can use the ABORT and CONT softkey to stop and restart  
a p rint job that is in p rogress.  
1. Hewlett-Packard and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate  
Measurements  
Today, advances in measurement capabilities make connectors and  
connection techniques more important than ever. Damage to the con-  
nectors on calibration and verification devices, test p orts, cables, and  
other devices can degrade measurement accuracy and damage instru-  
ments. Rep lacing a damaged connector can cost thousands of dollars,  
not to mention lost time! This expense can be avoided by observing  
the simp le precautions presented in this book. This book also contains  
a brief list of tips for caring for electrical connectors.  
Choosing the Right Connector  
A critical but often overlooked factor in making a good lightwave mea-  
surement is the selection of the fiber- op tic connector. The differences  
in connector typ es are mainly in the mechanical assembly that holds  
the ferrule in position against another identical ferrule. Connectors  
also vary in the polish, curve, and concentricity of the core within the  
cladding. Mating one style of cable to another requires an adap ter.  
Agilent Technologies offers adapters for most instruments to allow  
testing with many different cables. Figure 2- 3 on page 2- 41 shows the  
basic components of a typical connectors.  
The system tolerance for reflection and insertion loss must be known  
when selecting a connector from the wide variety of currently available  
connectors. Some items to consider when selecting a connector are:  
• How much insertion loss can be allowed?  
• Will the connector need to make multiple connections? Some connectors  
are better than others, and some are very poor for making repeated  
connections.  
• What is the reflection tolerance? Can the system take reflection degra-  
dation?  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
• Is an instrument- grade connector with a precision core alignment re-  
quired?  
• Is rep eatability tolerance for reflection and loss imp ortant? Do your  
specifications take repeatability uncertainty into account?  
• Will a connector degrade the return loss too much, or will a fusion  
splice be required? For example, many DFB lasers cannot operate with  
reflections from connectors. Often as much as 90 dB isolation is needed.  
Figure 2-3. Basic components of a connector.  
Over the last few years, the FC/PC style connector has emerged as the  
most p op ular connector for fiber-op tic ap p lications. While not the  
highest performing connector, it represents a good compromise  
between performance, reliability, and cost. If properly maintained and  
cleaned, this connector can withstand many repeated connections.  
However, many instrument sp ecifications require tighter tolerances  
than most connectors, including the FC/PC style, can deliver. These  
instruments cannot tolerate connectors with the large non- concentrici-  
ties of the fiber common with ceramic style ferrules. When tighter  
alignment is required, Agilent Technologies instruments typically use a  
connector such as the Diamond HMS-10, which has concentric toler-  
ances within a few tenths of a micron. Agilent Technologies then uses  
a sp ecial universal adap ter, which allows other cable typ es to mate  
with this precision connector. See Figure 2- 4.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Figure 2-4. Universal adapters to Diamond HMS-10.  
The HMS- 10 encases the fiber within a soft nickel silver (Cu/Ni/Zn)  
center which is surrounded by a tough tungsten carbide casing, as  
shown in Figure 2- 5.  
Figure 2-5. Cross-section of the Diamond HMS-10 connector.  
The nickel silver allows an active centering p rocess that p ermits the  
glass fiber to be moved to the desired p osition. This p rocess first  
stakes the soft nickel silver to fix the fiber in a near-center location,  
then uses a p ost- active staking to shift the fiber into the desired p osi-  
tion within 0.2 µm. This process, plus the keyed axis, allows very pre-  
cise core- to-core alignments. This connector is found on most Agilent  
Technologies lightwave instruments.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
The soft core, while allowing p recise centering, is also the chief liabil-  
ity of the connector. The soft material is easily damaged. Care must be  
taken to minimize excessive scratching and wear. While minor wear is  
not a problem if the glass face is not affected, scratches or grit can  
cause the glass fiber to move out of alignment. Also, if unkeyed con-  
nectors are used, the nickel silver can be p ushed onto the glass sur-  
face. Scratches, fiber movement, or glass contamination will cause loss  
of signal and increased reflections, resulting in p oor return loss.  
Inspecting Connectors  
Because fiber- optic connectors are susceptible to damage that is not  
immediately obvious to the naked eye, poor measurements result with-  
out the user being aware. Microscop ic examination and return loss  
measurements are the best way to ensure good measurements. Good  
cleaning p ractices can help ensure that op timum connector p erfor-  
mance is maintained. With glass- to- glass interfaces, any degradation of  
a ferrule or the end of the fiber, any stray particles, or finger oil can  
have a significant effect on connector performance. Where many repeat  
connections are required, use of a connector saver or p atch cable is  
recommended.  
Figure 2- 6 shows the end of a clean fiber- op tic cable. The dark circle  
in the center of the micrograph is the fiber’s 125 µm core and cladding  
which carries the light. The surrounding area is the soft nickel- silver  
ferrule. Figure 2- 7 shows a dirty fiber end from neglect or p erhap s  
improper cleaning. Material is smeared and ground into the end of the  
fiber causing light scattering and poor reflection. Not only is the preci-  
sion polish lost, but this action can grind off the glass face and destroy  
the connector.  
Figure 2- 8 shows p hysical damage to the glass fiber end caused by  
either rep eated connections made without removing loose p articles or  
using improper cleaning tools. When severe, the damage of one con-  
nector end can be transferred to another good connector endface that  
comes in contact with the damaged one. Periodic checks of fiber ends,  
and replacing connecting cables after many connections is a wise prac-  
tice.  
The cure for these problems is disciplined connector care as described  
in the following list and in “Cleaning Connectors” on page 2- 47.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Use the following guidelines to achieve the best possible performance  
when making measurements on a fiber- optic system:  
• Never use metal or sharp objects to clean a connector and never scrape  
the connector.  
• Avoid matching gel and oils.  
Figure 2-6. Clean, problem-free fiber end and ferrule.  
Figure 2-7. Dirty fiber end and ferrule from poor cleaning.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Figure 2-8. Damage from improper cleaning.  
While these often work well on first insertion, they are great dirt mag-  
nets. The oil or gel grabs and holds grit that is then ground into the  
end of the fiber. Also, some early gels were designed for use with the  
FC, non- contacting connectors, using small glass spheres. When used  
with contacting connectors, these glass balls can scratch and p it the  
fiber. If an index matching gel or oil must be used, ap p ly it to a  
freshly cleaned connector, make the measurement, and then immedi-  
ately clean it off. Never use a gel for longer- term connections and  
never use it to imp rove a damaged connector. The gel can mask the  
extent of damage and continued use of a damaged fiber can transfer  
damage to the instrument.  
• When inserting a fiber-optic cable into a connector, gently insert it in  
as straight a line as possible. Tipping and inserting at an angle can  
scrape material off the inside of the connector or even break the inside  
sleeve of connectors made with ceramic material.  
• When inserting a fiber- optic connector into a connector, make sure that  
the fiber end does not touch the outside of the mating connector or  
adapter.  
• Avoid over tightening connections.  
Unlike common electrical connections, tighter is not better. The p ur-  
p ose of the connector is to bring two fiber ends together. Once they  
touch, tightening only causes a greater force to be applied to the deli-  
cate fibers. With connectors that have a convex fiber end, the end can  
be pushed off- axis resulting in misalignment and excessive return loss.  
Many measurements are actually imp roved by backing off the connec-  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
tor pressure. Also, if a piece of grit does happen to get by the cleaning  
procedure, the tighter connection is more likely to damage the glass.  
Tighten the connectors just until the two fibers touch.  
• Keep connectors covered when not in use.  
• Use fusion sp lices on the more p ermanent critical nodes. Choose the  
best connector possible. Replace connecting cables regularly. Frequently  
measure the return loss of the connector to check for degradation, and  
clean every connector, every time.  
All connectors should be treated like the high-quality lens of a good  
camera. The weak link in instrument and system reliability is often the  
inappropriate use and care of the connector. Because current connec-  
tors are so easy to use, there tends to be reduced vigilance in connec-  
tor care and cleaning. It takes only one missed cleaning for a p iece of  
grit to permanently damage the glass and ruin the connector.  
Measuring insertion loss and return loss  
Consistent measurements with your lightwave equip ment are a good  
indication that you have good connections. Since return loss and inser-  
tion loss are key factors in determining optical connector performance  
they can be used to determine connector degradation. A smooth, p ol-  
ished fiber end should p roduce a good return-loss measurement. The  
quality of the polish establishes the difference between the “PC” (phys-  
ical contact) and the “Super PC” connectors. Most connectors today are  
physical contact which make glass- to-glass connections, therefore it is  
critical that the area around the glass core be clean and free of  
scratches. Although the major area of a connector, excluding the glass,  
may show scratches and wear, if the glass has maintained its p olished  
smoothness, the connector can still p rovide a good low level return  
loss connection.  
If you test your cables and accessories for insertion loss and return  
loss up on receip t, and retain the measured data for comp arison, you  
will be able to tell in the future if any degradation has occurred. Typ -  
ical values are less than 0.5 dB of loss, and sometimes as little as 0.1  
dB of loss with high performance connectors. Return loss is a measure  
of reflection: the less reflection the better (the larger the return loss,  
the smaller the reflection). The best physically contacting connectors  
have return losses better than 50 dB, although 30 to 40 dB is more  
common.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Visual inspection of fiber ends  
Visual insp ection of fiber ends can be help ful. Contamination or  
imperfections on the cable end face can be detected as well as cracks  
or chip s in the fiber itself. Use a microscop e (100X to 200X magnifica-  
tion) to inspect the entire end face for contamination, raised metal, or  
dents in the metal as well as any other imperfections. Inspect the fiber  
for cracks and chips. Visible imperfections not touching the fiber core  
may not affect p erformance (unless the imp erfections keep the fibers  
from contacting).  
WA R N IN G  
Always remove both ends of fiber-optic cables from any instrument,  
system, or device before visually inspecting the fiber ends. Disable all  
optical sources before disconnecting fiber-optic cables. Failure to do  
so may result in permanent injury to your eyes.  
Cleaning Connectors  
The p rocedures in this section p rovide the p rop er step s for cleaning  
fiber-optic cables and Agilent Technologies universal adapters. The ini-  
tial cleaning, using the alcohol as a solvent, gently removes any grit  
and oil. If a caked- on layer of material is still p resent, (this can hap -  
pen if the beryllium- copper sides of the ferrule retainer get scraped  
and deposited on the end of the fiber during insertion of the cable), a  
second cleaning should be p erformed. It is not uncommon for a cable  
or connector to require more than one cleaning.  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
C A U T IO N  
Agilent Technologies strongly recommends that index matching compounds  
not be applied to their instruments and accessories. Some compounds, such as  
gels, may be difficult to remove and can contain damaging particulates. If you  
think the use of such compounds is necessary, refer to the compound  
manufacturer for information on application and cleaning procedures.  
Table 2-2. Cleaning Accessories  
Item  
Agilent Part Number  
Any commercially available denatured alcohol  
Cotton swabs  
5080-5400  
Table 2-3. Dust Caps Provided with Lightwave Instruments  
Item  
Agilent Part Number  
FC/PC dust cap  
DIN dust cap  
08154-44102  
08154-44103  
08154-44101  
HMS10/dust cap  
To clean a non- lensed connector  
C A U T IO N  
Do not use any type of foam swab to clean optical fiber ends. Foam swabs can  
leave filmy deposits on fiber ends that can degrade performance.  
1 Ap p ly p ure isop rop yl alcohol to a clean lint- free cotton swab or lens  
paper.  
Cotton swabs can be used as long as no cotton fibers remain on the  
fiber end after cleaning.  
2 Clean the ferrules and other parts of the connector while avoiding the  
end of the fiber.  
3 Ap p ly isop rop yl alcohol to a new clean lint- free cotton swab or lens  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
paper.  
4 Clean the fiber end with the swab or lens paper.  
Do not scrub during this initial cleaning because grit can be caught in  
the swab and become a gouging element.  
5 Immediately dry the fiber end with a clean, dry, lint- free cotton swab  
or lens paper.  
6 Blow across the connector end face from a distance of 6 to 8 inches  
using filtered, dry, compressed air. Aim the compressed air at a shallow  
angle to the fiber end face.  
Nitrogen gas or comp ressed dust remover can also be used.  
C A U T IO N  
Do not shake, tip, or invert compressed air canisters, because this releases  
particles in the can into the air. Refer to instructions provided on the  
compressed air canister.  
7 As soon as the connector is dry, connect or cover it for later use.  
If the performance, after the initial cleaning, seems poor try cleaning  
the connector again. Often a second cleaning will restore p rop er p er-  
formance. The second cleaning should be more arduous with a scrub-  
bing action.  
To clean an adapter  
The fiber- op tic inp ut and outp ut connectors on many Agilent Technol-  
ogies instruments employ a universal adapter such as those shown in  
the following p icture. These adap ters allow you to connect the instru-  
ment to different types of fiber- optic cables.  
Figure 2-9. Universal adapters.  
1 Ap p ly isop rop yl alcohol to a clean foam swab.  
Cotton swabs can be used as long as no cotton fibers remain after clean-  
ing. The foam swabs listed in this section’s introduction are small  
enough to fit into adapters.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Measurements  
Cleaning Connections for Accurate Measurements  
Although foam swabs can leave filmy deposits, these deposits are very  
thin, and the risk of other contamination buildup on the inside of adapt-  
ers greatly outweighs the risk of contamination by foam swabs.  
2 Clean the adapter with the foam swab.  
3 Dry the inside of the adapter with a clean, dry, foam swab.  
4 Blow through the adap ter using filtered, dry, comp ressed air.  
Nitrogen gas or comp ressed dust remover can also be used. Do not  
shake, tip, or invert compressed air canisters, because this releases par-  
ticles in the can into the air. Refer to instructions provided on the com-  
p ressed air canister.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Addressing and Initializing the Instrument 3- 3  
To change the GPIB address 3-4  
Making Measurements 3- 5  
Commands are grouped in subsystems 3-7  
Measurement instructions give quick results 3-9  
The format of returned data 3-15  
Monitoring the Instrument 3- 16  
Status registers 3-17  
Queues 3-22  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules 3- 23  
Example Programs 3- 28  
Example 1. Measure a DFB laser 3-30  
Example 2. Measure WDM channels 3-32  
Example 3. Measure WDM channel drift 3-34  
Example 4. Measure WDM channel separation 3-37  
Example 5. Measure signal-to-noise ratio of each WDM channel 3-39  
Example 6. Increase a sources wavelength accuracy 3-41  
Lists of Commands 3- 43  
Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Programming  
Programming  
This chapter explains how to program the Agilent 86120C. The pro-  
gramming syntax conforms to the IEEE 488.2 Standard Digital Inter-  
face for Programmable Instrumentation and to the Standard  
Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI).  
Where to begin…  
The programming examples for individual commands in this manual  
are written in HP1 BASIC 6.0 for an HP 9000 Series 200/300 Control-  
ler.  
For more detailed information regarding the GPIB, the IEEE 488.2  
standard, or the SCPI standard, refer to the following books:  
Hewlett-Packard Company. Tutorial Description of Hewlett- Packard  
Interface Bus, 1987.  
Hewlett-Packard Company. SCPI—Standard Commands for Program-  
mable Instruments, 1995.  
International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE  
Standard 488.1- 1987, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programma-  
ble Instrumentation. New York, NY, 1987.  
International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE  
Standard 488.2- 1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and  
Common commands For Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1- 1987. New York,  
NY, 1987.  
Types of commands  
The Agilent 86120C responds to three types of commands:  
• Common commands  
• Measurement instructions  
• Subsystem commands  
All of these commands are documented in Chapter 4, “Programming  
Commands”.  
1. HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Addressing and Initializing the Instrument  
Addressing and Initializing the Instrument  
The Agilent 86120C’s GPIB address is configured at the factory to a  
value of 20. You must set the outp ut and inp ut functions of your p ro-  
gramming language to send the commands to this address. You can  
change the GPIB address from the front p anel as described in  
change the GPIB address” on p age 3- 4 .  
“To  
Remote mode and front- panel lockout  
Whenever the instrument is controlled by a comp uter, the Remote  
message is displayed on the instrument’s screen and the softkey menu  
is blanked except for the LOCAL softkey. This softkey can be p ressed  
by the user to restore front p anel control of the instrument.  
You can specify a local lockout mode that prevents the LOCAL softkey  
from being displayed. If the instrument is in local lockout mode, all the  
softkeys may be blanked. For example, if the instrument is first placed  
in local lockout mode and then placed in remote mode, no softkeys are  
displayed.  
Consult the documentation for your programming environment to  
determine which commands are used to p ut an instrument in the  
remote and local lockout modes. These are not Agilent 86120C com-  
mands; they control GPIB control lines and do not send any characters  
to the Agilent 86120C.  
Initialize the instrument at start of every program  
It is good p ractice to initialize the instrument at the start of every  
program. This ensures that the bus and all appropriate interfaces are  
in a known state. HP BASIC provides a CLEAR command which clears  
the interface buffer and also resets the instrument’s p arser. (The  
p arser is the p rogram that reads the instructions that you send.)  
Whenever the instrument is under remote p rogramming control, it  
should be in the single measurement acquisition mode. This is auto-  
matically accomplished when the *RST common command is used. The  
*RST command initializes the instrument to a p reset state:  
CLEAR 720  
OUTPUT 720;*RST”  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Addressing and Initializing the Instrument  
Notice in the examp le above, that the commands are sent to an instru-  
ment address of 720. This indicates address 20 on an interface with  
select code 7. Pressing the green Preset key does not change the GPIB  
address.  
Set single acquisition mode  
An advantage of using the *RST command is that it sets the  
Agilent 86120C into the single measurement acquisition mode. Because  
the READ and MEASure data queries expect this mode, their proper  
operation is ensured.  
To change the GPIB address  
1 Press the Setup key.  
2 Press MORE twice, then GPIB.  
3 Use the  
and  
softkeys to change the GPIB address.  
4 Press RETURN.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
Making Measurements  
Making measurements remotely involves changing the Agilent 86120C’s  
settings, performing a measurement, and then returning the data to  
the computer. The simplified block diagram of the Agilent 86120C  
shown here lists some of the available p rogramming commands. Each  
command is p laced next to the instrument section it configures or  
queries data from.  
Notice that there are two buffers from which data can be queried: an  
uncorrected data buffer and a corrected data buffer. With each scan of  
the input wavelength range, the analog- to- digital converter loads  
65,536 data values into the uncorrected data buffer. This is considered  
to be one “measurement”. A fast- update measurement mode is avail-  
able for quicker measurement acquisition. But, because only 32,768  
data values are collected in fast- update measurement mode, the ability  
to resolve closely sp aced signals is reduced.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
After collecting the uncorrected data, the Agilent 86120C searches the  
data for the first 200 p eak resp onses. (For WLIMit:OFF, searching  
starts at 1650 nm and progresses towards 1270 nm. For WLIMit:ON,  
searching starts at WLIMit:START and p rogresses toward  
WLIMit:STOP.) These p eak values are then p laced into the corrected  
data buffer. Each p eak value consists of an amplitude and wavelength  
measurement. Amplitude and wavelength correction factors are applied  
to this data.  
For a listing of the p rogramming commands (including a cross refer-  
ence to front- p anel keys), refer to the following tables:  
Table 3-10, “Programming Commands,” on page 3- 43  
Table 3-11, “Keys Versus Commands,” on page 3- 48  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
Commands are grouped in subsystems  
The Agilent 86120C commands are grouped in the following sub-  
systems. You’ll find a description of each command in Chapter 4, “Pro-  
gramming Commands”.  
Subsystem  
Purpose of Commands  
Measurement  
Instructions  
Perform frequency, wavelength, and wavenumber  
measurements.  
CALCulate1  
CALCulate2  
CALCulate3  
Queries uncorrected frequency-spectrum data.  
Queries corrected peak data and sets wavelength limits.  
Performs delta, drift, signal-to-noise, and Fabry-Perot  
measurements.  
DISPlay  
HCOPy  
SENSe  
Applies markers and displays power bars.  
Prints measurement results.  
Sets elevation-correction values, selects readings for air or  
vacuum, and enters amplitude offsets. Queries time-domain  
values of the input data.  
STATus  
SYSTem  
TRIGger  
Queries instrument status registers.  
Presets Agilent 86120C and queries error messages.  
Stops current measurement. Acquires new measurement data.  
Also used to select single or continuous acquisition of  
measurement data.  
UNIT  
Sets the amplitude units to watts or dBm.  
Table 2-4 on page 3- 8 shows the kinds of measurements that the  
Agilent 86120C can p erform and the associated p rogramming com-  
mands used to return that data. In some cases, there is more than one  
method that can be used to obtain the desired data. Refer to Chapter  
4, “Programming Commands” for the correct syntax for these com-  
mands.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
Table 2-4. Commands for Capturing Data  
Desired  
Measurement  
Command to Configure Measurement  
(partial listing)  
Command to Query Data  
Wavelength (nm)  
CONFigure, FETCh, READ, and MEASure  
MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WAVelengt  
h?  
Frequency (THz)  
CONFigure, FETCh, READ, and MEASure  
MEASure:ARRay:POWer:FREQuency  
?
Wavenumber (m1)  
Power (W, dBm)  
CONFigure, FETCh, READ, and MEASure  
CONFigure, FETCh, READ, and MEASure  
CALCulate2:PWAVerage:STATe  
MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WNUMber?  
MEASure:ARRay:POWer?  
CALCulate2:DATA?  
Average Wavelength,  
Wavenumber, or Frequency  
Total Power (W, dBm)  
Fabry-Perot Laser  
CALCulate2:PWAVerage:STATe  
CALCulate3:FPERot  
CALCulate2:DATA?  
Refer to FPERot[:STATE]on  
page 4-62  
Laser-Line Separation  
Laser-Line Drift  
CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence  
CALCulate3:DRIFt:STATe  
CALCulate3:SNR:STATe  
CALCulate3:ASNR:STATe  
CALCulate3:DATA?  
CALCulate3:DATA?  
CALCulate3:DATA?  
CALCulate3:DATA?  
SENSe:DATA?  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio Average  
Time-Domain Data  
CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINt  
s
Corrected Frequency Domain  
Data  
CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINt  
s
CALCulate2:DATA?  
CALCulate1:DATA?  
Uncorrected Frequency Domain  
Data  
CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINt  
s
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
Measurement instructions give quick results  
The easiest way to measure wavelength, frequency, or power is to use  
the MEASure command. The MEASure command is one of four mea-  
surement instructions: MEASure, READ, FETCh, and CONFigure. The  
syntax for measurement instructions is documented in “Measurement  
Instructions” on page 4- 15.  
Each measurement instruction has an argument that controls the mea-  
surement up date rate. This is equivalent to using the  
NORMAL and  
FAST softkeys.  
:MEASure command  
MEASure configures the Agilent 86120C, captures new data, and que-  
ries the data all in one step . For examp le, to measure the longest  
wavelength, send the following command:  
:MEASure:SCALar:POWer:WAVelength? MAX  
Table 2-5. The Different Forms of MEASure  
Desired  
Measurement Data  
Use this  
MEASure Query  
Display Format  
Power (W, dBm)  
Frequency (Hz)  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer?  
List by Power  
:MEASure:SCALar:POWer?  
single wavelength mode  
List by WL (frequency)  
single wavelength mode  
List by WL  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer:FREQuency?  
:MEASure:SCALar:POWer:FREQuency?  
MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WAVelength?  
MEASure:SCALar:POWer:WAVelength?  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WNUMber?  
:MEASure:SCALar:POWer:WNUMber?  
Wavelength (m)  
Wavenumber (m1)  
single wavelength mode  
List by WL  
single wavelength mode  
Sp ecifying SCALar p laces the disp lay in the single wavelength format  
and returns a single value to the comp uter. Sp ecifying ARRay p laces  
the display in the List by Power or List by WL modes; an array of data is  
returned to the computer.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
A common p rogramming error is to send the :MEASure command  
when the instrument is in the continuous measurement acquisition  
mode. Because :MEASure contains an :INIT:IMM command, which  
expects the single measurement acquisition mode, an error is gener-  
ated, and the INIT command is ignored.  
:READ command  
The READ command works like the MEASure command except that it  
does not configure the instrument’s settings. You can use the CONFig-  
ure command to configure the instrument for a particular measure-  
ment without returning any data.  
The MEASure and READ commands are identical to combining the fol-  
lowing commands:  
Command  
:MEASure  
:READ  
Equivalent Commands  
:ABORt;:CONFigure;:READ  
:ABORt;:INITiate:IMMediate;:FETCh  
A common p rogramming error is to send the :READ command when  
the instrument is in the continuous measurement acquisition mode.  
Because :READ contains an :INIT:IMM command, which expects the  
single measurement acquisition mode, an error is generated, and the  
INIT command is ignored.  
:FETCh command  
The FETCh command returns data from previously performed mea-  
surements; it does not initiate the collection of new data. Because  
FETCh does not configure the instrument or acquire new inp ut data,  
you can use FETCh repeatedly on the same set of acquired data. For  
example, use two FETCh commands to return wavelength and then  
p ower values for the same measurement. This is shown in the follow-  
ing program fragment:  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:CONT OFF;”  
OUTPUT 720;:CONF:ARR:POW MAX”  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
OUTPUT 720;:FETC:ARR:POW?”  
ENTER 720:powers$  
OUTPUT 720;:FETC:ARR:POW:WAV?”  
ENTER 720:wavelengths$  
In the example above, the data in the power and wavelength arrays are  
returned in the same order so that p owers can be matched to wave-  
lengths.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
Also, because new data is not collected, FETCh is especially useful  
when characterizing transient data.  
FETCh does not reconfigure the disp lay. For examp le, if the disp lay is  
in the Peak WL mode, sending :FETCh:ARRay does not configure the  
display to the List by WL even though an array of data is returned to  
the computer.  
A common p rogramming error occurs when the :FETCh command is  
used after an *RST command. This generates error number –230,  
“Data corrupt or stale”. In this instance, you must send :INIT:IMM  
after the *RST command and before the :FETCh command to capture a  
new array of measurement data.  
:CONFigure command  
The CONFigure command changes measurement settings without taking  
a measurement. The instrument is p laced in the List by WL, List by  
Ampl, or Peak WL display application.  
CONFigure can be queried. The query returns the last configuration  
setup by the CONFigure command. The instrument returns a string  
which is the last instrument function sent by a CONFigure command  
or MEASure query. The returned string is in the short command form.  
Use caution when using this query, because if any instrument settings  
were changed since the last CONFigure command or MEASure query  
these changes may not be included in the returned string.  
For examp le, if the last CONFigure command was:  
:CONFigure:SCALar:POWer:WAVelength 1300NM, MAX  
a CONFigure? query would return a string that is similar to the follow-  
ing line:  
POW:WAV 1.300000e-6,0.01”  
The 1300NM and resolution values track the actual instrument settings  
and input signals. Notice that the quotation marks are part of the  
returned string.  
Return single or multiple measurement values  
You can specify whether FETCh, READ, or MEASure returns a single  
value (SCALar) or multiple values (ARRay). The following example  
specifies SCALar data which returns a single value.  
:MEASure:SCALar:POWer:WAVelength? MAX  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
ARRay and the SCPI standard  
According to the SCPI command reference, the ARRay command causes an instru-  
ment to take multiple measurements. (A <size> parameter indicates the number  
of measurements to take.) However, the Agilent 86120Cs ARRay command refers  
to the measurements performed for one measurement sweep; this results in an  
array of measured signals. Because the <size> parameter does not apply, any  
<size> parameter sent will be ignored by the instrument. No syntax error will be  
generated if a <size> parameter is sent.  
Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential com-  
mands  
The Agilent 86120C normally processes its remote programming com-  
mands sequentially. The instrument waits until the actions specified by  
a p articular command are comp letely finished before reading and exe-  
cuting the next command. However, there are a few non- sequential  
commands where this is not true. Non- sequential commands do not  
finish executing before the next command is interp reted.  
The following is a list of the Agilent 86120C’s non- sequential com-  
mands:  
:CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINTs  
:CALCulate2:PEXCursion  
:CALCulate2:PTHReshold  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:FREQuency  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:WAVelength  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:WNUMber  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:FREQuency  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:WAVelength  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:WNUMber  
:CALCulate3:SNR:AUTO  
:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation  
:INITiate:CONTinuous  
:INITiate[:IMMediate]  
The following additional commands are also non- sequential commands  
if CALCulate3:SNR:AUTO is set to OFF:  
:CALCulate3:REFerence:FREQuency  
:CALCulate3:REFerence:WAVelength  
:CALCulate3:REFerence:WNUMber  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
The benefit of non- sequential commands is that, in some situations,  
they can reduce the overall execution times of programs. For example,  
you can set the peak excursion, peak threshold, and elevation and use  
a *WAI command at the end to save time. However, non- sequential  
commands can also be a source of annoying errors. Always use the  
*OPC query or *WAI command with the non- sequential commands to  
ensure that your programs execute properly.  
For examp le, sup p ose that you wanted to set the elevation correction  
value and then send an :INIT:IMM command. The following p rogram-  
ming fragment results in an error “–213 Init ignored”. This occurs  
because the :ELEVation command causes the recalculation of the data  
which is like sending the :INIT:IMM command. When the actual  
:INIT:IMM is sent, the error occurs because the command is already in  
progress.  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
OUTPUT 720;:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation 1000”  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
Use an *OPC? query to ensure that the :ELEVation command has com-  
pleted as shown in the following lines:  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
OUTPUT 720;:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation 1000”  
OUTPUT 720;*OPC?”  
ENTER 720;Response$  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
Or, the *WAI command could be used:  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
OUTPUT 720;:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation 1000”  
OUTPUT 720;*WAI?”  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
Measure delta, drift, and signal-to- noise  
To select a measurement, use one of the following STATe commands:  
CALC3:DELT:POW:STAT (delta power)  
CALC3:DELT:WAV:STAT (delta wavelength)  
CALC3:DELT:WPOW:STAT (delta power and wavelength)  
CALC3:DRIF:STAT (drift)  
CALC3:SNR:STAT (signal-to-noise ratios)  
CALC3:ASNR:STAT (signal-to-noise ratio averaging)  
If you select a drift measurement, you can select one of the following  
additional states:  
CALC3:DRIF:DIFF:STAT (difference)  
CALC3:DRIF:MAX:STAT (maximum drift)  
CALC3:DRIF:MIN:STAT (minimum drift)  
CALC3:DRIF:REF:STAT (drift reference values)  
The :CALCulate3:DRIFt:PRESet command turns off the minimum, max-  
imum, difference, and reference states but leaves the drift state on.  
Attemp ting to turn more than one state on at a time results in an  
“–221 Settings Conflict” error.  
The *RST and SYSTem:PRESet commands turn all calculations off.  
CALCulate3:PRESet turns off any CALCulate3 calculations.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Making Measurements  
The format of returned data  
Measurements are returned as strings  
All measurement values are returned from the Agilent 86120C as  
ASCII strings. When an array is returned, the individual values are  
separated by the comma character.  
Determine the number of data points  
When a FETCh, READ, or MEASure command is used (with ARRay  
sp ecified), the first returned value indicates the total number of mea-  
surement values returned in the query.  
If you use the:CALCulate1:DATA?, :CALCulate2:DATA?, or  
:CALCulate3:DATA? queries to query data, send the :POINts? query  
first to determine the number of values returned in the string. The  
string does not contain a first value which specifies the string length.  
This is shown in the following examp le:  
OUTPUT 720;:CALCulate1:POINts?”  
ENTER 720;Length  
OUTPUT 720;:CALCulate1:DATA?”  
ENTER 720;Result$  
Data can be corrected for elevation and vacuum  
Normally, the Agilent 86120C provides measurement values calculated  
for conditions in air at sea level. Use the :SENSe:CORRection:ELEVa-  
tion command to comp ensate for air disp ersion. Altitudes up to 5000  
meters can be entered. Use the :SENSe:CORRection:MEDium command  
to switch to readings in a vacuum.  
Amplitude units  
The default amp litude units are dBm. If you need measurements in  
watts, use the :UNIT:POWer command. When the Agilent 86120C is  
turned on, the amp litude units are automatically set to the units used  
before the instrument was last turned off.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
Monitoring the Instrument  
Almost every p rogram that you write will need to monitor the  
Agilent 86120C for its operating status. This includes querying execu-  
tion or command errors and determining whether or not measure-  
ments have been completed. Several status registers and queues are  
provided to accomplish these tasks.  
In this section, you’ll learn how to enable and read these registers. In  
addition to the information in this section, you should review the com-  
mands documented in “Common Commands” on page 4- 3 and “STATus  
Subsystem” on page 4- 90.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
Status registers  
The Agilent 86120C p rovides four registers which you can query to  
monitor the instrument’s condition. These registers allow you to deter-  
mine the following items:  
• Status of an operation  
• Availability of the measured data  
• Reliability of the measured data  
All four registers are shown in the figure on the following p age and  
have the following uses:  
Register  
Definition  
Status Byte  
Monitors the status of the other three registers.  
Standard Event Status  
This is the standard IEEE 488.2 register. Contains  
bits which indicate the status of the other two regis-  
ters.  
OPERation Status  
Contains bits that report on the instruments normal  
operation.  
QUEStionable Status  
Contains bits that report on the condition of the sig-  
nal.  
Status Byte register  
The Status Byte Register contains summary bits that monitor activity  
in the other status registers and queues. The Status Byte Register’s  
bits are set and cleared by the presence and absence of a summary bit  
from other registers or queues. Notice in the following figure that the  
bits in the Standard Event Status, OPERation status, and QUEStionable  
status registers are “or’d” to control a bit in the Status Byte Register.  
If a bit in the Status Byte Register goes high, you can query the value  
of the source register to determine the cause.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
The Status Byte Register can be read using either the *STB? common  
command or the GPIB serial poll command. Both commands return the  
decimal- weighted sum of all set bits in the register. The difference  
between the two methods is that the serial poll command reads bit 6  
as the Request Service (RQS) bit and clears the bit which clears the  
SRQ interrup t. The *STB? command reads bit 6 as the Master Sum-  
mary Status (MSS) and does not clear the bit or have any effect on the  
SRQ interrupt. The value returned is the total bit weights of all of the  
bits that are set at the p resent time.  
OPERation Status and QUEStionable Status registers  
You can query the value of the OPERation Status and QUEStionable  
Status registers using commands in the STATus subsystem.  
The STATus subsystem also has transition filter software which give  
you the ability to select the logic transitions which set bits in the  
OPERation Status and QUEStionable Status registers. For example, you  
can define the POWer bit of the QUEStionable Status register to report  
an event when the condition transitions from false to true. This is a  
positive transition. You can also specify a negative transition where the  
bit is set when the condition transitions from true to false.  
Table 3-6. Bits in Operation Status Register  
Bit  
Definition  
0
1
not used  
SETTling - indicating that the instrument is waiting for the motor to reach  
the proper position before beginning data acquisition.  
2
RANGing - indicating the instrument is currently gain ranging.  
3
not used  
4
MEASuring - indicating that the instrument is making a measurement.  
5 through 8  
9
not used  
Processing - indicating that the instrument is currently processing the  
data acquired.  
10  
Hardcopy - indicating that the instrument is currently printing the data to  
the parallel port.  
11  
Averaging - indicating that the instrument is in the process of averaging  
the noise for the signal-to-noise ratio calculation.  
12 through 16  
not used  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
Table 3-7. Bits in Questionable Status Register  
Bit  
Definition  
0, 1, and 2  
not used  
3
POWer - indicating that the instrument is measuring too high of a power.  
3 through 8  
9
not used  
Maximum signals - indicating that the instrument has found the  
maximum number of signals.  
10  
Drift Reference - indicating that the number of reference signals is  
different from the current number of input signals.  
11  
Delta Reference - indicating that there is no delta reference signal.  
12 through 13  
14  
not used  
Command Warning - indicating that the instrument has received some  
extra unexpected parameters for one of the measurement functions.  
15  
not used  
Standard Event Status register  
The Standard Event Status Register monitors the following instrument  
status events:  
• OPC - Op eration Comp lete  
• RQC - Request Control  
• QYE - Query Error  
• DDE - Device Dep endent Error  
• EXE - Execution Error  
• CME - Command Error  
• URQ - User Request  
• PON - Power On  
When one of these events occur, the event sets the corresp onding bit  
in the register. If the bits are enabled in the Standard Event Status  
Enable Register, the bits set in this register generate a summary bit to  
set bit 5 (ESB) in the Status Byte Register.  
The contents of the Standard Event Status Register can be read and  
the register cleared by sending the *ESR? query. The value returned is  
the total bit weights of all of the bits that are set at the p resent time.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
Enabling register bits with masks  
Several masks are available which you can use to enable or disable  
individual bits in each register. For example, you can disable the Hard-  
copy bit in the OPERation Status Register so that even though it goes  
high, it can never set the summary bit in the status byte high.  
Use the *SRE common command to set or query the mask for the Sta-  
tus Byte Register.  
The masks for the OPERation Status and QUEStionable Status registers  
are set and queried using the STATus subsystem’s ENABle commands.  
Use the *ESE common command to set or query the mask for the  
Standard Event Status Register.  
The *CLS common command clears all event registers and all queues  
excep t the outp ut queue. If *CLS is sent immediately following a p ro-  
gram message terminator, the output queue is also cleared. In addition,  
the request for the *OPC bit is also cleared.  
For example, suppose your application requires an interrupt whenever  
any type of error occurs. The error related bits in the Standard Event  
Status Register are bits 2 through 5. The sum of the decimal weights of  
these bits is 60. Therefore, you can enable any of these bits to generate  
the summary bit by sending the *ESE 60 command.  
Whenever an error occurs, it sets one of these bits in the Standard  
Event Status Register. Because the bits are all enabled, a summary bit  
is generated to set bit 5 in the Status Byte Register.  
If bit 5 (ESB) in the Status Byte Register is enabled (via the *SRE  
command), an SRQ service request interrup t is sent to the external  
computer.  
Standard Event Status Register bits that are not enabled still resp ond  
to their corresp onding conditions (that is, they are set if the corre-  
sp onding event occurs). However, because they are not enabled, they  
do not generate a summary bit to the Status Byte Register.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Monitoring the Instrument  
Queues  
There are two queues in the instrument: the output queue and the  
error queue. The values in the outp ut queue and the error queue can  
be queried.  
Output queue  
The output queue stores the instrument responses that are generated  
by certain commands and queries that you send to the instrument. The  
outp ut queue generates the Message Available summary bit when the  
output queue contains one or more bytes. This summary bit sets the  
MAV bit (bit 4) in the Status Byte Register. The method used to read  
the Outp ut Queue dep ends up on the p rogramming language and envi-  
ronment. For examp le, with HP BASIC, the outp ut queue may be read  
using the ENTER statement.  
Error queue  
As errors are detected, they are p laced in an error queue. Instrument  
specific errors are indicated by positive values. General errors have  
negative values. You can clear the error queue by reading its contents,  
sending the *CLS command, or by cycling the instrument’s power.  
The error queue is first in, first out. If the error queue overflows, the  
last error in the queue is rep laced with error - 350, “Queue overflow.”  
Any time the queue overflows, the least recent errors remain in the  
queue, and the most recent error is discarded. The length of the  
instrument’s error queue is 30 (29 p ositions for the error messages,  
and 1 position for the “Queue overflow” message).  
The error queue is read with the SYSTEM:ERROR? query. Executing  
this query reads and removes the oldest error from the head of the  
queue, which opens a p osition at the tail of the queue for a new error.  
When all the errors have been read from the queue, subsequent error  
queries return 0, “No error.”  
For more information on reading the error queue, refer to “ERRor” on  
page 4- 98. For a list of errors messages, refer to “Error Messages” on  
page 7- 11.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules  
SCPI command are grouped in subsystems  
In accordance with IEEE 488.2, the instrument’s commands are  
grouped into “subsystems.” Commands in each subsystem perform sim-  
ilar tasks. The following subsystems are provided:  
Measurement Instructions  
Calculate1 Subsystem  
Calculate2 Subsystem  
Calculate3 Subsystem  
Display Subsystem  
Hcopy Subsystem  
Sense Subsystem  
Status Subsystem  
System Subsystem  
Trigger Subsystem  
Unit Subsystem  
Sending a command  
It’s easy to send a command to the instrument. Simply create a com-  
mand string from the commands listed in this book, and p lace the  
string in your p rogram language’s outp ut statement. For commands  
other than common commands, include a colon before the subsystem  
name. For example, the following string places the cursor on the peak  
laser line and returns the p ower level of this p eak:  
OUTPUT 720;:MEAS:SCAL:POW? MAX”  
Use either short or long forms  
Commands and queries may be sent in either long form (comp lete  
sp elling) or short form (abbreviated sp elling). The descrip tion of each  
command in this manual shows both versions; the extra characters for  
the long form are shown in lowercase. The following is a long form of  
a command:  
OUTPUT 720;:MEASure:SCALar:POWer? MAXimum”  
And this is the short form of the same command:  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules  
OUTPUT 720;:MEAS:SCAL:POW? MAX”  
Programs written in long form are easily read and are almost self- doc-  
umenting. Using short form commands conserves the amount of con-  
troller memory needed for program storage and reduces the amount of  
I/O activity.  
The rules for creating short forms from the long form is as follows:  
The mnemonic is the first four characters of the keyword unless the  
fourth character is a vowel, in which case the mnemonic is the first  
three characters of the keyword.  
This rule is not used if the length of the keyword is exactly four char-  
acters.  
Table 3-8. Examples of Short Forms  
Long Form  
Equivalent Short Form  
ROUTE  
LAYER  
ROUT  
LAY  
SYSTEM  
ERROR  
SYST  
ERR  
You can use upper or lowercase letters  
Program headers can be sent using any combination of uppercase or  
lowercase ASCII characters. Instrument responses, however, are always  
returned in uppercase.  
Combine commands in the same subsystem  
You can combine commands from the same subsystem provided that  
they are both on the same level in the subsystem’s hierarchy. Simp ly  
separate the commands with a semi- colon (;). For example, the follow-  
ing two lines,  
OUTPUT 720;:CALC2:PEXC 12”  
OUTPUT 720;:CALC2:PTHR 20”  
can be combined into one line:  
OUTPUT 720;:CALC2:PEXC 12;PTHR 20”  
The semicolon sep arates the two functions.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules  
Combine commands from different subsystems  
You can send commands and program queries from different sub-  
systems on the same line. Simp ly p recede the new subsystem by a  
semicolon followed by a colon. In the following example, the colon and  
semicolon p air before DISP allows you to send a command from  
another subsystem.  
OUTPUT 720;:CALC2:PEXC 12;:DISP:WIND:GRAP:STAT OFF”  
Sending common commands  
If a subsystem has been selected and a common command is received  
by the instrument, the instrument remains in the selected subsystem.  
For examp le, if the p rogram message  
DISPLAY:MARK:MAX:LEFT;*CLS;DISP:MARK:MAX:RIGH”  
is received by the instrument, the Disp lay subsystem remains selected.  
If some other type of command is received within a program message,  
you must reenter the original subsystem after the command.  
Adding parameters to a command  
Many commands have p arameters that sp ecify an op tion. Use a sp ace  
character to separate the parameter from the command as shown in  
the following line:  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:CONT ON”  
Sep arate multip le p arameters with a comma (,). Sp aces can be added  
around the commas to imp rove readability.  
OUTPUT 720;:MEAS:SCAL:POW:FREQ? 1300, MAX”  
White space  
White sp ace is defined to be one or more characters from the ASCII  
set of 0 through 32 decimal, excluding 10 (NL). White sp ace is usually  
optional, and can be used to increase the readability of a program.  
Numbers  
All numbers are expected to be strings of ASCII characters. Thus,  
when sending the number 9, you would send a byte rep resenting the  
ASCII code for the character “9” (which is 57). A three-digit number  
like 102 would take up three bytes (ASCII codes 49, 48, and 50). This  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules  
is taken care of automatically when you include the entire instruction  
in a string. Several rep resentations of a number are p ossible. For  
example, the following numbers are all equal:  
28  
0.28E2  
280E-1  
28000m  
0.028K  
28E-3K  
If a measurement cannot be made, no resp onse is given and an error  
is p laced into the error queue. For examp le,  
*RST  
FETCh:POW?  
will timeout the controller and p lace a Data stale or corrupt error in  
the error queue.  
Table 3-9. Suffix Multipliers  
Multiplier  
Mnemonic  
1E18  
1E15  
1E12  
1E9  
EX  
PE  
T
G
1E6  
MA  
K
1E3  
1E-3  
1E-6  
1E-9  
1E-12  
1E-15  
1E-18  
M
U
N
P
F
A
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Reviewing SCPI Syntax Rules  
Program message terminator  
The string of instructions sent to the instrument are executed after the  
instruction terminator is received. The terminator may be either a  
new- line (NL) character, the End- Or- Identify (EOI) line asserted, or a  
combination of the two. All three ways are equivalent. Asserting the  
EOI sets the EOI control line low on the last byte of the data message.  
The NL character is an ASCII linefeed (decimal 10). The NL terminator  
has the same function as an EOS (End Of String) and EOT (End Of  
Text) terminator.  
Querying data  
Data is requested from the instrument using a query. Queries can be  
used to find out how the instrument is currently configured. They are  
also used to get results of measurements made by the instrument, with  
the query actually activating the measurement. String responses are  
returned as upper- case letters.  
Queries usually take the form of a command followed by a question  
mark (?). After receiving a query, the instrument places the answer in  
its outp ut queue. The answer remains in the outp ut queue until it is  
read or another command is issued. For example, the query  
OUTPUT 720;:CALCULATE2:POINTS?”  
places the number of points in the data set in the output queue. In HP  
BASIC, the controller inp ut statement:  
ENTER 720;Range  
passes the value across the bus to the controller and places it in the  
variable Range. A newline character is appended to the response.  
Sending another command or query before reading the result of a  
query causes the outp ut queue to be cleared and the current resp onse  
to be lost. This also generates an error in the error queue.  
The outp ut of the instrument may be numeric or character data  
depending on what is queried. Refer to the specific commands for the  
formats and types of data returned from queries.  
You can send multip le queries to the instrument within a single p ro-  
gram message, but you must also read them back within a single p ro-  
gram message. This can be accomp lished by either reading them back  
into a string variable or into multip le numeric variables. When you  
read the result of multip le queries into string variables, each response  
is separated by a semicolon.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example Programs  
The following example programs are provided in this section:  
Example 1. Measure a DFB laser 3- 30  
Example 2. Measure WDM channels 3- 32  
Example 3. Measure WDM channel drift 3- 34  
Example 4. Measure WDM channel separation 3- 37  
Example 5. Measure signal- to- noise ratio of each WDM channel 3- 39  
Example 6. Increase a source’s wavelength accuracy 3- 41  
These programs are provided to give you examples of using  
Agilent 86120C remote programming commands in typical applications.  
They are not meant to teach general p rogramming techniques or p ro-  
vide ready- to- use solutions. They should allow you to see how mea-  
surements are p erformed and how to return data to the comp uter.  
All of the examp les are written in the HP BASIC p rogramming lan-  
guage.  
Many subroutines are repeated in the examples  
The first five example programs contain several common subroutines.  
These routines, along with one function, are described in the rest of  
this introduction. The descrip tions are listed in the general order that  
the subroutines are called in the programs.  
Error_msg subroutine  
This function is found in examp les 2, 3, 4, and 5. It disp lays an error  
message on the computer’s screen explaining the reason that the pro-  
gram’s execution stop p ed.  
Set_ese subroutine  
The subroutine sets the enable mask for the event status register to a  
value of 52. This allows bits 2, 4, and 5 to be set whenever a query  
error (QYE), execution error (EXE), or command error (CME) respec-  
tively occurs. All this is accomp lished using the *ESE common com-  
mand.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
The Err_mngmt subroutine is used to actually read the value of the  
event status register. Examples 1 through 5 call this subroutine.  
FNIdentity function  
When this function is called, it resets the instrument and queries the  
instrument’s identification string which is disp layed on the comp uter’s  
screen by the calling function. To accomplish this task, the FNIdentity  
function uses the *RST, *OPC?, and *IDN? common commands. This  
function is called from Examples 1 through 5.  
Err_mngmt subroutine  
This subroutine checks to make sure that no errors have set bits in the  
event status register and that there are no errors in the queue. Exiting  
this subroutine is only possible if no errors have occurred. Notice that  
the logic test in the subroutine tests for the same event status register  
bits enabled by the Set_ese subroutine: BIT(Cme,5), BIT(Cme,4),  
BIT(Cme,2).  
This subroutine is called in Examples 1 through 5. However, it is mod-  
ified in Examp les 3, 4, and 5 to allow it to indicate the last p rogram-  
ming command that was sent to the instrument before an error  
occurred. This is accomp lished by adding an op tional argument string.  
Cmd_opc subroutine  
The Cmd_op c subroutine, found in Examp les 3, 4, and 5, p auses the  
program until a non- sequential command has finished executing on the  
Agilent 86120C. It uses the *OPC? query.  
For more information on non- sequential commands, refer to “Always  
force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commands” on  
page 3- 12.  
Tempo subroutine  
This subroutine, which is only found in Examp le 3, p auses the p ro-  
gram for a few seconds while the Agilent 86120C measures the drift  
on a laser. The argument in the example sets the pause for 10 seconds.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example 1. Measure a DFB laser  
This p rogram measures the p ower and wavelength of a DFB laser. It  
first sets the Agilent 86120C in the single-acquisition measurement  
mode. Then, it triggers the Agilent 86120C with the MEASure com-  
mand to capture measurement data of the input spectrum. Because the  
data is stored in the instrument’s memory, it can be queried as  
needed.  
Refer to the introduction to this section for a description of each sub-  
routine that is contained in this program.  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720  
Set_ese  
PRINT USING "37A,33A";"Multi-Wavelength Meter Identity is : ";FNIdentity$  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":INIT:CONT OFF"  
ON TIMEOUT 7,5 CALL Err_mngmt  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":MEAS:SCAL:POW:WAV?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Current_wl  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":FETC:SCAL:POW?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Current_pwr  
OFF TIMEOUT  
PRINT USING "20A,4D.3D,3A,19A,M2D.2D,4A";"The wavelength is : ";Current_wl /1.0E-9;" nm";" with a  
power of : ";Current_pwr;" dBm"  
END  
Err_mngmt:SUB Err_mngmt  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
DIM Err_msg$[255]  
INTEGER Cme  
CLEAR 7  
REPEAT !  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Cme  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":SYST:ERR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Err_msg$  
PRINT Err_msg$  
UNTIL NOT BIT(Cme,2) AND NOT BIT(Cme,4) AND NOT BIT(Cme,5) AND  
POS(Err_msg$,"+0")  
Subend:SUBEND  
Set_ese:SUB Set_ese  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESE ";IVAL("00110100",2)  
SUBEND  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Identity:DEF FNIdentity$;  
COM /Instrument/ @MwmV  
DIM Identity$[50]  
Identity$=""  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Identity$  
RETURN Identity$  
FNEND  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example 2. Measure WDM channels  
This p rogram measures the multip le laser lines of a WDM system. It  
measures both the p ower and wavelengths of each line. First, the p ro-  
gram sets the Agilent 86120C in the single- acquisition measurement  
mode. Then, it triggers the Agilent 86120C with the MEASure com-  
mand to capture measurement data of the input spectrum. Because the  
data is stored in the instrument’s memory, it can be queried as  
needed.  
Refer to the introduction to this section for a description of each sub-  
routine that is contained in this program.  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720  
ON ERROR GOTO Error_msg,  
Set_ese  
PRINT USING "37A,33A";"Multi-Wavelength Meter Identity is : ";FNIdentity$  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":INIT:CONT OFF"  
ON TIMEOUT 7,5 CALL Err_mngmt  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":MEAS:ARR:POW:WAV?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_wl  
ALLOCATE Current_wl(1:Nb_wl)  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_wl(*)  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":FETC:ARR:POW?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_wl  
ALLOCATE Current_pwr(1:Nb_wl)  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_pwr(*)  
FOR I=1 TO Nb_wl  
PRINT USING "22A,2D,6A,4D.2DE,4A,S2D.2D,3A";"The wavelength number  
";Current_wl(I);" at ";Current_pwr(I);"dBm"  
NEXT I  
OFF TIMEOUT  
STOP  
Error_msg:  
PRINT "the prgm is aborted due to : ";ERRM$  
END  
Err_mngmt:SUB Err_mngmt  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
DIM Err_msg$[255]  
INTEGER Cme  
CLEAR 7  
REPEAT  
OUTPUT @Mwm; "*ESR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Cme  
OUTPUT @Mwm; ":SYST:ERR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Err_msg$  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
PRINT Err_msg$  
UNTIL NOT BIT(Cme,2) AND NOT BIT(Cme,4) AND NOT BIT(Cme,5) AND  
Err$,"+0")  
Subend:SUBEND  
Set_ese:SUB Set_ese  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm; "*ESE";IVAL("00110100",2)  
SUBEND  
Identity:DEF FNIdentity$;  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
DIM Identity$[50]  
Identity$=""  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Identity$  
RETURN Identity$  
FNEND  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example 3. Measure WDM channel drift  
This program measures the drift of channels in a WDM system. It  
measures drift in both p ower and wavelength of each line. First, the  
program sets the Agilent 86120C in the continuous- acquisition mea-  
surement mode. Then, it measures drift using commands from the  
CALCulate3 subsystem.  
Notice the use of the Temp o subroutine to p ause the p rogram for 10  
seconds while the Agilent 86120C measures the drift on the system.  
The use of the Err_mngmt subroutine is op tional. Refer to the intro-  
duction to this section for a descrip tion of each subroutine that is  
contained in this program.  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720  
DIM Key$[1]  
ON ERROR GOTO Error_msg  
Set_ese  
PRINT USING "37A,33A";"Multi-Wavelength Meter Identity is: " ;FNIdentity$  
ON TIMEOUT 7,5 CALL Err_mngmt  
Cmd_opc("*RST")  
Cmd_opc(":INIT:IMM")  
Cmd_opc("*OPC")  
Cmd_opc(":CONF:ARR:POW:WAV")  
! Turn on the drift calculation  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DRIF:STAT ON")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:DRIF:STAT ON")  
! Turn off all drift states  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DRIF:PRES")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:DRIF:PRES")  
! Turn on drift reference state  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DRIF:REF:STAT ON")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:DRIF:REF:STAT ON")  
! Query the number of data points  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:POIN?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_pt  
ALLOCATE Current_ref_wl(1:Nb_pt)  
ALLOCATE Current_ref_pwr(1:Nb_pt)  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
! Query reference wavelengths and powers  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? WAV"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_ref_wl(*)  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? POW"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_ref_pwr(*)  
! Turn off drift reference state  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DRIF:REF:STAT OFF")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:DRIF:REF:STAT OFF")  
! Turn on drift max min calculation  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DRIF:DIFF:STAT ON")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:DRIF:DIFF:STAT ON")  
Tempo(10)  
ALLOCATE Current_diff_wl(1:Nb_pt)  
ALLOCATE Current_diff_pw(1:Nb_pt)  
! Query drift wavelengths and powers  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? WAV"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_diff_wl(*)  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? POW"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_diff_pw(*)  
OFF TIMEOUT  
FOR I=1 TO Nb_pt  
PRINT USING "18A,2D,6A,M4D.2DE,3A,21A,MDD.3DE,3A";"Wavelength number "  
;I;" is : ";Current_ref_wl(I);" m";" with a drift from : ";Current_diff_wl(I);" m"  
PRINT USING "28A,SDD.2DE,4A,20A,MDD.3DE,3A,/";"it has a power level of  
: ";Current_ref_pwr(I);" dBm";" with a drift from : ";Current_diff_pw(I);" dB";  
NEXT I  
STOP  
Error_msg: !  
PRINT "The program is aborted due to : ";ERRM$  
END  
Err_mngmt:SUB Err_mngmt(OPTIONAL Cmd_msg$)  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwmt  
DIM Err_msg$[255]  
INTEGER Cme  
CLEAR @Mwm  
REPEAT  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Cme  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":SYST:ERR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Err_msg$  
IF NPAR>0 AND NOT POS(Err_msg$,"+0") THEN PRINT "This command  
";Cmd_msg$;" makes the following error :"  
IF NOT POS(Err_msg$,"+0") THEN PRINT Err_msg$  
UNTIL NOT BIT(Cme,2) AND NOT BIT(Cme,4) AND NOT BIT(Cme,5) AND  
POS(Err_msg$,"+0")  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Subend:SUBEND  
Set_ese:SUB Set_ese  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESE ";IVAL("00110100",2)  
SUBEND  
Identity:DEF FNIdentity$;  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
DIM Identity$[50]  
Identity$=""  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Identity$  
RETURN Identity$  
FNEND  
Cmd_opc:SUB Cmd_opc(Set_cmd$)  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm;Set_cmd$  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done$  
SUBEND  
Tempo:SUB Tempo(Temp)  
FOR I=Temp TO 0 STEP -1)  
DISP "Waiting for ";VAL$(I);" sec . . . "  
WAIT 1  
NEXT I  
DISP ""  
SUBEND  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example 4. Measure WDM channel separation  
This program measures the line separations on a WDM system. It mea-  
sures separation (delta) between power and wavelength of each line  
using commands from the CALCulate3 subsystem.  
Refer to the introduction to this section for a description of each sub-  
routine that is contained in this program.  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720  
DIM Key$[1]  
ON ERROR GOTO Error_msg  
Set_ese  
PRINT USING "37A,33A";"Multi-Wavelength Meter Identity is : ";FNIdentity$  
ON TIMEOUT 7,5 CALL Err_mngmt  
Cmd_opc("*RST")  
! Change to list-by-wavelength display  
Cmd_opc(":CONF:ARR:POW:WAV")  
! Trigger and wait for one measurement  
Cmd_opc(":INIT")  
Cmd_opc("*WAI")  
! Turn on delta mode  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DELT:WPOW:STAT ON")  
! Set first wavelength as reference  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:DELT:REF:WAV MIN")  
! Query number of data points  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:POIN?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_pt  
ALLOCATE Delta_wl(1:Nb_pt)  
ALLOCATE Delta_pwr(1:Nb_pt)  
! Query wavelengths and powers  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? WAV"  
ENTER @Mwm;Delta_wl(*)  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? POW"  
ENTER @Mwm;Delta_pwr(*)  
OFF TIMEOUT  
FOR I=1 TO Nb_pt-1  
PRINT USING "6A,2D,17A,M4D.3D,31A,S2D.2D,4A";"Line :";I;" wavelength is :  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
";(Delta_wl(I)+((NOT I=1)*Delta_wl(1)))/1.0E-9;" nm. Absolute line level is :  
";Delta_pwr(I)+(NOT I=1)*Delta_pwr(1);" dBm"  
PRINT USING "17A,2D,6A,M4D.3D,23A,2D,6A,S2D.2D,3A";"Delta Wl to line ",I+1,"  
is : ";(Delta_wl(I+1)-(NOT I=1)*Delta_wl(I))/1.E-9;" nm, Delta Pwr to line ",I+1," is :  
";(I=1)*(Delta_pwr(I+1))+(NOT I=1)*(Delta_pwr(I+1)-Delta_pwr(I));" dB"  
NEXT I  
PRINT USING "6A,2D,17A,M4D.3D,31A,S2D.2D,4A";"Line : ";I;" wavelength is :  
";(Delta_wl(1)+Delta_wl(Nb_pt))/1.0E-9;" nm. Absolute line level is : ";Delta_pwr(1)+Delta_pwr(Nb_pt);"  
dBm"  
STOP  
Error_msg: !  
PRINT "The program is aborted due to : ";ERRM$  
END  
Err_mngmt:SUB Err_mngmt(OPTIONAL Cmd_msg$)  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwmt  
DIM Err_msg$[255]  
INTEGER Cme  
CLEAR @Mwm  
REPEAT  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Cme  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":SYST:ERR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Err_msg$  
IF NPAR>0 AND NOT POS(Err_msg$,"+0") THEN PRINT "This command  
";Cmd_msg$;" makes the following error :"  
IF NOT POS(Err_msg$,"+0") THEN PRINT Err_msg$  
UNTIL NOT BIT(Cme,2) AND NOT BIT(Cme,4) AND NOT BIT(Cme,5) AND  
POS(Err_msg$,"+0")  
Subend:SUBEND  
Set_ese:SUB Set_ese  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESE ";IVAL("00110100",2)  
SUBEND  
Identity:DEF FNIdentity$;  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
DIM Identity$[33]  
Identity$=""  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Identity$  
RETURN Identity$  
FNEND  
Cmd_opc:SUB Cmd_opc(Set_cmd$)  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm;Set_cmd$  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done$  
SUBEND  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example 5. Measure signal- to- noise ratio of each  
WDM channel  
This program measures signal-to- noise ratios on a WDM system. It  
measures the ratio for each line using commands from the CALCulate3  
subsystem.  
Refer to the introduction to this section for a description of each sub-  
routine that is contained in this program.  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720  
DIM Key$[1]  
ON ERROR GOTO Error_msg,  
Set_ese  
PRINT USING "37A,33A";"Multi-Wavelength Meter Identity is : ";FNIdentity$  
ON TIMEOUT 7,5 CALL Err_mngmt  
Cmd_opc("*RST")  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":MEAS:ARR:POW:WAV?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_pt  
ALLOCATE Current_wl(1:Nb_pt)  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_wl(*)  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":FETC:ARR:POW?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_pt  
ALLOCATE Current_pwr(1:Nb_pt)  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Current_pwr(*)  
! Turn signal-to-noise ratio on  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:SNR:STAT ON")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:SNR:STAT ON")  
! Set first wavelength as noise reference  
Cmd_opc(":CALC3:SNR:REF:WAV MIN")  
Err_mngmt(":CALC3:SNR:REF:WAV MIN")  
! Query number of data points  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:POIN?"  
ENTER @Mwm USING "#,K";Nb_pt  
ALLOCATE Snr_pwr(1:Nb_pt)  
! Query signal-to-noise values  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":CALC3:DATA? POW"  
ENTER @Mwm;Snr_pwr(*)  
OFF TIMEOUT  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
FOR I=1 TO Nb_pt  
PRINT USING "7A,2D,17A,M4D.3D,25A,S2D.2D,22A,2D.2D,3A";"Line : ";I;"  
wavelength is : ";Current_wl(I)/1.0E-9;" nm, absolute level is : ";Current_pwr(I);" dBm,  
with a SNR of : ";Snr_pwr(I);" dB"  
NEXT I  
STOP  
Error_msg: !  
PRINT "The program is aborted due to : ";ERRM$  
END  
Err_mngmt:SUB Err_mngmt(OPTIONAL Cmd_msg$)  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwmt  
DIM Err_msg$[255]  
INTEGER Cme  
CLEAR @Mwm  
REPEAT !  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Cme  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":SYST:ERR?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Err_msg$  
IF NPAR>0 AND NOT POS(Err_msg$,"+0") THEN PRINT "This command  
";Cmd_msg$;" makes the following error :"  
IF NOT POS(Err_msg$,"+0") THEN PRINT Err_msg$  
UNTIL NOT BIT(Cme,2) AND NOT BIT(Cme,4) AND NOT BIT(Cme,5) AND  
POS(Err_msg$,"+0")  
Subend:SUBEND  
Set_ese:SUB Set_ese  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*ESE ";IVAL("00110100",2)  
SUBEND  
Identity:DEF FNIdentity$;  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwm  
DIM Identity$[50]  
Identity$=""  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Identity$  
RETURN Identity$  
FNEND  
Cmd_opc:SUB Cmd_opc(Set_cmd$)  
COM /Instrument/ @Mwmd  
OUTPUT @Mwm;Set_cmd$  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*OPC?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Opc_done$  
SUBEND  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
Example 6. Increase a source’s wavelength accuracy  
This examp le p rogram uses the Agilent 86120C to increase the abso-  
lute wavelength accuracy of Agilent 8167A, 8168B, and 8168C Tunable  
Laser Sources. Essentially, the Agilent 86120C’s accuracy is transferred  
to the tunable laser source. The absolute accuracy of the tunable laser  
source is increased from < 0.1 nm to < 0.003 nm which is the  
Agilent 86120C’s absolute accuracy (at 1550 nm).  
In order to run this program, the tunable laser source’s firmware must  
support the automatic alignment command, WAVEACT.  
The program uses the following measurement algorithm:  
Identify and initialize the Agilent 86120C and tunable laser source  
Ask user for desired wavelength  
Set wavelength of tunable laser source  
Turn tunable laser sources output on  
Enter loop  
Measure wavelength  
Compare wavelength to desired wavelength  
Realign tunable laser sources wavelength  
Check if wavelength changed from last pass  
Repeat until (delta wavelength < 0.0015 nm or wavelength is stable)  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Example Programs  
COM Current_wl,Diff_wl.Target_wl,Previous_diff,Diff_diff  
Current_wl=0  
Diff_wl=0  
Target_wl=0  
Previous_diff=O  
Diff_diff=0  
ASSIGN @Tls TO 724  
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720  
! Initialize instrument  
DIM Identity$[50]  
Identity$=""  
OUTPUT @Tls;"*CLS"  
OUTPUT @Tls;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @TLS;identity$  
PRINT "TLS IS A ";identity$  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*CLS"  
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*IDN?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Identity$  
PRINT "MWM IS A ";identity$  
! Ask user for desired wavelength  
INPUT "What wavelength (nm)do you wish to have",Target_wl  
Target_wl=Target_wl*1.OE-9  
PRINT "the target wavelength is : ";Target_wl  
! Set wavelength of tunable laser source  
OUTPUT @Tls; ":WAVE ";VAL$(Target_wl)  
OUTPUT @Tls; ":OUTP ON"  
! Enter realignment loop  
REPEAT  
OUTPUT @Mwm;":MEAS:SCAL:POW:WAV?"  
ENTER @Mwm;Current_wl  
PRINT "The current wavelength is : ";VAL$(Current_wl)  
Diff_wl=PROUND(ABS(Target_wl-Current_wl),-16)  
PRINT "Diff between target & Current is (+ or -) : ";VAL$(Diff_wl)  
OUTPUT @Tls;":WAVEACT ";VAL$(Current_wl)  
Diff_diff=PROUND(ABS(Diff_wl-Previous_diff),-16)  
PRINT "differential difference between two turn : ";VAL$(Diff_diff)  
Previous_diff=Diff_wl  
UNTIL (Diff_wl<1.5*1.0E-12) OR (Diff_diff=0)  
END  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-10. Programming Commands (1 of 5)  
Command  
Description  
Code  
Codes: S indicates a standard SCPI command. I indicates an instrument specific command.  
Common Commands  
*CLS  
*ESE  
*ESR?  
*IDN?  
*OPC  
*RCL  
*RST  
*SAV  
*SRE  
*STB  
*TRG  
*TST?  
*WAI  
Clears all event registers and the error queue.  
Sets the bits in the standard-event status enable register.  
Queries value standard-event status register.  
Queries instrument model number and firmware version.  
Sets operation complete bit of the standard-event status register.  
Recalls a saved instrument state.  
Resets instrument.  
Saves an instrument state.  
Sets bits in service-request enable register.  
Queries value of status byte.  
Triggers acquisition of measurement data.  
Performs an instrument self test.  
Causes instrument to finish processing current command before  
continuing.  
Measurement Instructions  
:CONFigure  
Configures instrument for wavelength, wavenumber,  
frequency, power, and measurements.  
I
I
I
I
:FETCh  
Queries wavelength, wavenumber, frequency, power, and  
measurements that have already been captured.  
:MEASure  
:READ  
Configures, measures, and queries wavelength,  
wavenumber, frequency, power, and measurements.  
Measures and queries wavelength, wavenumber,  
frequency, power, and measurements.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-10. Programming Commands (2 of 5)  
Command  
Description  
Code  
Codes: S indicates a standard SCPI command. I indicates an instrument specific command.  
CALCulate1 (CALC1) Subsystem  
:CALCulate1:DATA?  
Queries the uncorrected frequency-spectrum data of the  
S
S
input signal.  
:CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts?  
CALCulate2 (CALC2) Subsystem  
:CALCulate2:DATA?  
Sets and queries the number of points in the data set.  
Queries the corrected frequency-spectrum data of the  
input signal.  
S
:CALCulate2:PEXCursion  
:CALCulate2:POINts?  
Sets the peak excursion limit.  
I
I
I
I
Queries the number of points in the data set.  
Sets the peak threshold limit.  
:CALCulate2:PTHReshold  
:CALCulate2:PWAVerage[:STATe]?  
Places the instrument in the average-wavelength mode.  
Data queries return the power-weighted average  
frequency, wavelength, or wavenumber or total power.  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit[:STATe]  
Turns wavelength limiting on and off.  
I
I
I
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:FREQuency  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt[:WAVelength]  
Sets the starting frequency for the wavelength limit range.  
Sets the starting wavelength for the wavelength limit  
range.  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:WNUMber  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:FREQuency  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP[:WAVelength]  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:WNUMber  
Sets the starting wavenumber for the wavelength limit  
range.  
I
I
I
I
Sets the stopping frequency for the wavelength limit  
range.  
Sets the stopping wavelength for the wavelength limit  
range.  
Sets the stopping wavenumber for the wavelength limit  
range.  
CALCulate3 (CALC3) Subsystem  
:CALCulate3:ASNR:CLEar  
:CALCulate3:ASNR:COUNt  
Resets and restarts the signal-to-noise ratio averaging.  
I
I
Sets the number of measurements to average the signal-  
to-noise ratio.  
:CALCulate3:ASNR:[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DATA?  
Turns signal-to-noise ratio averaging mode on and off.  
I
Queries the data resulting from delta, drift, and signal-to-  
noise measurements.  
S
:CALCulate3:DELTa:POWer[:STATe]  
Turns the delta power measurement mode on and off.  
I
I
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence:FREQuency  
Selects the signal to be used as the reference for the  
DELTa calculations.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence:POWer?  
3-44  
Queries the power level of the reference signal.  
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-10. Programming Commands (3 of 5)  
Command  
Description  
Code  
Codes: S indicates a standard SCPI command. I indicates an instrument specific command.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence[:WAVelength]  
Selects the signal to be used as the reference for the  
DELTa calculations.  
I
I
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence:WNUMber  
Selects the signal to be used as the reference for the  
DELTa calculations.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:WAVelength[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:WPOWer[:STATe]  
Turns the delta wavelength measurement mode on and off.  
I
I
Turns the delta wavelength and power measurement mode  
on and off.  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:DIFFerence[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:MAXimum[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:MINimum[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:PRESet  
Sets the drift calculation to subtract the minimum values  
measured from the maximum values measured.  
I
I
I
I
Sets the drift calculation to return the maximum power  
(frequency) values measured.  
Sets the drift calculation to return the minimum power  
(frequency) values measured.  
Turns off all the drift states for DIFFerence, MAXimum,  
MINimum, and REFerence.  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:REFerence:RESet  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:REFerence[:STATe]  
Places the current list of signals into the reference list.  
I
I
Turns the drift state on and off so that CALC3:DATA? will  
return the reference signal list.  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt[:STATe]  
Turns the drift measurement calculation on and off.  
Turns the Fabry-Perot measurement mode on and off.  
Queries the mean wavelength of the selected modes.  
Queries the mean frequency of the selected modes.  
Queries the mean wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Queries the peak wavelength of the selected modes.  
Queries the peak frequency of the selected modes.  
Queries the peak wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Queries the peak power of the selected modes.  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:CALCulate3:FPERot[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MEAN:[WAVelength]?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MEAN:FREQuency?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MEAN:WNUMber?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:PEAK:[WAVelength]?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:PEAK:FREQuency?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:PEAK:WNUMber?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:PEAK:POWer?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:FWHM:[WAVelength]?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:FWHM:FREQuency?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:FWHM:WNUMber?  
Queries full width half-max wavelength of selected modes.  
Queries full width half-max frequency of selected modes.  
Queries full width half-max wavenumber of selected  
modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MODE:SPACing:[WAVelengt Queries the mode spacing wavelength of the selected  
h]? modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MODE:SPACing:FREQuenc Queries the mode spacing frequency of the selected  
y? modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MODE:SPACing:WNUMbe Queries the mode spacing wavenumber of the selected  
I
I
I
r?  
modes.  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-10. Programming Commands (4 of 5)  
Command  
Description  
Code  
Codes: S indicates a standard SCPI command. I indicates an instrument specific command.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:POWer:[WAVelength]?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:POWer:FREQuency?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:POWer:WNUMber?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:SIGMa:[WAVelength]?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:SIGMa:FREQuency?  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:SIGMa:WNUMber?  
:CALCulate3:POINts?  
Queries the power wavelength of the selected modes.  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Queries the power frequency of the selected modes.  
Queries the power wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Queries the sigma wavelength of the selected modes.  
Queries the sigma frequency of the selected modes.  
Queries the sigma wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Queries the number of points in the data set.  
:CALCulate3:PRESet  
Turns off any CALCulate3 calculation that is on.  
:CALCulate3:SNR:AUTO  
Selects the internal or externally entered frequency value  
for the noise measurement reference in the SNR  
calculation.  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence:FREQuency  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence[:WAVelength]  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence:WNUMber  
Sets the frequency used for the noise measurement  
reference in the SNR calculation.  
I
I
I
I
Sets the wavelength used for the noise measurement  
reference in the SNR calculation.  
Sets the wave number used for the noise measurement  
reference in the SNR calculation.  
:CALCulate3:SNR[:STATe]  
DISPlay Subsystem  
Turns the SNR calculation on and off.  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum  
Sets the marker to the signal with the largest power.  
I
I
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT  
Moves marker to signal with the next lower wavelength or  
frequency.  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT  
Moves the marker to the signal with the closest power  
level just below the power level of the signal at the current  
marker position.  
I
I
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:PREVious  
Moves the marker to the signal with the closest power  
level just above the power level of the signal at the current  
marker position.  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt  
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:GRAPhics:STATe  
Moves marker to the next higher wavelength or frequency.  
Turns the instrument display of the power bars on and off.  
I
S
HCOPy Subsystem  
:HCOPy:IMMediate  
SENSe Subsystem  
Starts a printout.  
S
I
:SENSe:CORRection:DEVice  
Configures wavelength measurements for narrowband or  
wideband devices.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-10. Programming Commands (5 of 5)  
Command  
Description  
Code  
Codes: S indicates a standard SCPI command. I indicates an instrument specific command.  
:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation  
Sets the elevation value used by the instrument to  
compensate for air dispersion.  
I
:SENSe:CORRection:OFFSet:MAGNitude  
:SENSe:CORRection:MEDium  
Sets the power offset value used by the instrument.  
S
Sets the instrument to return the wavelength reading in a  
vacuum when the parameter is on. Parameters are VAC  
and AIR.  
I
:SENSe:DATA?  
Queries the time domain samples of the input signal.  
I
STATus Subsystem  
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:CONDitio Returns the value for the condition register for the node.  
n?  
S
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:EVENt?  
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:ENABle  
Returns the value of the event register for the node.  
Sets the enable register.  
S
S
S
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:PTRansit  
ion  
Sets the positive transition filter register.  
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:NTRansit Sets the negative transition filter register.  
ion  
S
S
:STATus:PRESet  
Presets the enable registers for all status nodes.  
SYSTem Subsystem  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
Queries an error from the error queue.  
S
I
:SYSTem:HELP:HEADers?  
Queries an ASCII listing of all Agilent 86120C remote  
commands.  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
:SYSTem:VERSion  
Performs the equivalent of a front-panel PRESET key  
press.  
S
S
Queries the version of SCPI with which this instrument is  
compliant.  
TRIGger Subsystem  
:ABORt  
Stops the current measurement sequence.  
S
S
:INITiate:IMMediate  
Places the instrument into the initiated state and initiates  
a new measurement sequence.  
:INITiate:CONTinuous  
Sets the instrument for single or continuous  
measurement.  
S
UNIT Subsystem  
:UNIT[:POWer]  
Sets the power units to watts (linear) or dBm (logarithmic).  
S
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-11. Keys Versus Commands (1 of 2)  
Key  
Equivalent Command  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:POWer[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:WAVelength[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:WPOWer[:STATe]  
See DRIFT, S/N, and FP TEST  
:CALCulate3:SNR:AUTO ON  
PWR  
WL  
WL/PWR  
Appl's  
AUTO  
Avg WL  
BAR OFF  
BAR ON  
BROAD  
CAL  
:CALCulate2:PWAVerage[:STATe]  
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:GRAPhics:STATe  
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:GRAPhics:STATe  
:SENSe:CORRection:DEVice BROad  
See ELEV, PWR OFS, STD AIR, and VACUUM  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WNUMber  
:INITiate:CONTinuous ON  
CM-1  
Cont  
DBM  
:UNIT:POWer  
DEVICE  
DRIFT  
:SENSe:CORRection:DEVice  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt[:STATe]  
ELEV  
:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation  
State dependent  
EXIT  
FAST  
See UPDATE  
FP TEST  
GPIB  
:CALCulate3:FPERot[:STATe]  
none  
List by Power  
List by WL  
MAX-MIN  
MW  
:CONFigure:ARRay:POWer  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WAVelength  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:MINimum[:STATe] and :CALCulate3:DRIFt:MAXimum[:STATe]  
:UNIT:POWer  
NARROW  
NEXT PK  
NEXT WL  
NM  
:SENSe:CORRection:DEVice NARRow  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer:WAVelength  
See UPDATE  
NORMAL  
OFF  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:POWer[:STATe]  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:POWer[:STATe]  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum  
ON  
PEAK  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
Table 3-11. Keys Versus Commands (2 of 2)  
Key  
Equivalent Command  
Peak WL  
PK EXC  
PK THLD  
POWER  
Preset  
See NEXT PK, NEXT WL, PEAK, PREV PK, and PREV WL  
:CALCulate2:PEXCursion  
:CALCulate2:PTHReshold  
:UNIT:POWer  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
PREV PK  
PREV WL  
Print  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:PREVious  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT  
:HCOPy:IMMediate  
PWR BAR  
PWR OFF  
RESET  
See BAR ON and BAR OFF  
:SENSe:CORRection:OFFSet:MAGNitude  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:REFerence:RESet  
:CALCulate3:SNR:STATe  
S/N  
S/N AVG  
SELECT  
Setup  
:CALCulate3:ASNR:STATe  
:CONFigure:POWer  
See CAL, UNITS, and UPDATE  
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF  
Single  
START WL  
STOP WL  
STD AIR  
THRSHLD  
THZ  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP  
:SENSe:CORRection:MEDium AIR  
See PK EXC and PK THLD  
:MEASure:ARRay:POWer:FREQuency  
:UNIT:POWer  
UNITS  
UPDATE  
USER  
Measurement Instructions and :CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts  
:CALCulate3:SNR:AUTO OFF  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence[:WAVelength]  
UNIT:POWer  
USER WL  
UW  
VACUUM  
WL  
:SENSe:CORRection:MEDium VACuum  
See CM, NM, and THZ  
WL REF  
See AUTO, USER, and USER WL  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming  
Lists of Commands  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Common Commands 4- 3  
Measurement Instructions 4-15  
CALCulate1 Subsystem 4- 25  
CALCulate2 Subsystem 4- 31  
CALCulate3 Subsystem 4- 44  
CONFigure Measurement Instruction 4- 74  
DISPlay Subsystem 4- 75  
FETCh Measurement Instruction 4- 79  
HCOPy Subsystem 4- 80  
MEASure Measurement Instruction 4- 81  
READ Measurement Instruction 4- 82  
SENSe Subsystem 4- 83  
STATus Subsystem 4- 90  
SYSTem Subsystem 4- 97  
TRIGger Subsystem 4- 103  
UNIT Subsystem 4-107  
Programming Commands  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Programming Commands  
Programming Commands  
This chap ter is the reference for all Agilent 86120C programming com-  
mands. Commands are organized by subsystem.  
Table 4-12. Notation Conventions and Definitions  
Convention  
Description  
< >  
|
Angle brackets indicate values entered by the programmer.  
Orindicates a choice of one element from a list.  
[ ]  
Square brackets indicate that the enclosed items are optional.  
{ }  
When several items are enclosed by braces, one, and only one of these  
elements must be selected.  
<integer>  
<real>  
An ASCII string representing an integer. This is defined by the IEEE 488.2  
<NR1> format.  
An ASCII string representing a real number. This is defined by the IEEE 488.2  
<NR2> or <NRf> formats.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
Common Commands  
Common commands are defined by the IEEE 488.2 standard. They  
control generic device functions which could be common among many  
different types of instruments. Common commands can be received  
and p rocessed by the instrument whether they are sent over the GPIB  
as separate program messages or within other program messages.  
*CLS  
The *CLS (clear status) command clears all the event status registers  
summarized in the status byte register.  
*CLS  
Syntax  
Description  
With the exception of the output queue, all queues that are summa-  
rized in the status byte register are emptied. The error queue is also  
emptied. Neither the event status enable register, nor the service  
request enable register are affected by this command.  
After the *CLS command, the instrument is left in the idle state. The  
command does not alter the instrument setting. *OPC and *OPC?  
actions are cancelled.  
This command cannot be issued as a query.  
*ESE  
The *ESE (event status enable) command sets the bits in the event sta-  
tus enable register and enables the corresponding bits in the event sta-  
tus register.  
*ESE <integer>  
*ESE?  
Syntax  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
<integer> is a mask from 0 to 255.  
Description  
The event status enable register contains a mask value for the bits to  
be enabled in the event status register. A bit set to one (1) in the  
event status enable register enables the corresp onding bit in the event  
status register to set the event summary bit in the status byte register.  
A zero (0) disables the bit. Refer to the following table for information  
about the event status enable register bits, bit weights, and what each  
bit masks. The event status enable register is cleared at power- on. The  
*RST and *CLS commands do not change the register. The *ESE? query  
returns the value of the event status enable register.  
Table 4-13. Event Status Enable Register  
Bita  
Bit Weight  
Enables  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
128  
64  
32  
16  
8
PON Power On  
Not Used  
CME Command Error  
EXE Execution Error  
DDE Device Dependent Error  
QYE Query Error  
Not Used  
4
2
1
OPC Operation Complete  
a. A high enables the event status register bit.  
Query Response  
Example  
<integer> is a mask from 0 to 255.  
OUTPUT 720;*ESE 32”  
In this examp le, the *ESE 32 command enables CME (event summary  
bit) bit 5 of the event status enable register. Therefore, when an incor-  
rect programming command is received, the CME (command error bit)  
in the status byte register is set.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*ESR?  
The *ESR (event status register) query returns the value of the event  
status register.  
*ESR?  
Syntax  
Description  
When you read the standard event status register, the value returned  
is the total of the bit weights of all of the bits that are set to one at  
the time you read the byte. The following table shows each bit in the  
event status register and its bit weight. The register is cleared when it  
is read.  
Table 4-14. Standard Event Status Register  
Bit  
Bit Weight  
Condition  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
128  
64  
32  
16  
8
PON Power On  
Not Used  
CME Command Error  
EXE Execution Error  
DDE Device Dependent Error  
QYE Query Error  
Not Used  
4
2
1
OPC Operation Complete  
Query Response  
Example  
<integer> ranges from 0 to 255.  
OUTPUT 720;*ESR?”  
ENTER 720;Event  
PRINT Event  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*IDN?  
The *IDN? (identification number) query returns a string value which  
identifies the instrument type and firmware version.  
*IDN?  
Syntax  
Description  
An *IDN? query must be the last query in a p rogram message. Any  
queries after the *IDN? query in a p rogram message are ignored.  
The maximum length of the identification string is 50 bytes.  
Query Response  
Example  
The following identification string is returned. The third entry is the  
instrument’s serial number. The last entry in the string is the firmware  
version number; this value may vary between instruments.  
Agilent 86120C, USaaaabbbb, 1.000  
DIM Id$[50]  
OUTPUT 720;*IDN?”  
ENTER 720;Id$  
PRINT Id$  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*OPC  
The *OPC (operation complete) command sets the operation complete  
bit in the event status register when all p ending device op erations  
have finished.  
*OPC  
*OPC?  
Syntax  
Description  
The *OPC? query p laces an ASCII “1” in the outp ut queue when all  
pending device operations have finished.  
This command is useful when the computer is sending commands to  
other instruments. The comp uter can p oll the event status register to  
check when the Agilent 86120C has comp leted the op eration. Use the  
*OPC? query to ensure all operations have completed before continuing  
the p rogram. By following a command with an *OPC? query and an  
ENTER statement, the p rogram will p ause until the resp onse (ASCII  
“1”) is returned by the instrument.  
Be sure the comp uter’s timeout limit is at least two seconds, since  
some of the Agilent 86120C commands take approximately one second  
to complete.  
1
Query Response  
Example  
OUTPUT 720;*OPC?”  
ENTER 720;Op$  
*RCL  
This command recalls a saved instrument state.  
Syntax  
*RCL <integer>  
<integer> range is 1 to 4.  
Description  
For a descrip tion of an instrument state, see *SAV command.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*RST  
The *RST (reset) command returns the Agilent 86120C to a known  
condition.  
*RST  
Syntax  
Description  
For a listing of reset conditions, refer to the following table. This com-  
mand cannot be issued as a query. Since this command p laces the  
instrument in single measurement acquisition mode, any current data  
is marked as invalid and a measurement query such as :FETCh?  
results in error number –230, “Data corrup t or stale”. You must ini-  
tiate a new sweep with :INIT:IMM before you can use the :FETCh com-  
mand.  
Table 4-15. Conditions Set by *RST Reset (1 of 2)  
Item  
Setting  
Display mode  
single wavelength  
1270 nm  
1650 nm  
off  
Start wavelength  
Stop wavelength  
Graphical display  
Measurement acquisition  
Wavelength calibration  
Elevation correction value  
Wavelength units  
Amplitude units  
single  
vacuum  
0 meters  
nm  
dBm  
Power offset  
0 dB  
Peak threshold  
10 dB  
Peak excursion  
15 dB  
Measurement speed  
normal  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
Table 4-15. Conditions Set by *RST Reset (2 of 2)  
Item  
Setting  
15,047  
Number of uncorrected data points  
Delta Measurements:  
power  
off  
off  
wavelength  
off  
wavelength and power  
reference signal position  
Drift measurements  
Signal-to-Noise Measurements:  
measurement  
1270 nm  
off  
off  
wavelength reference  
reference (user) wavelength  
number of averages (count)  
GPIB address  
auto  
1550 nm in vacuum  
100  
not affected  
on  
Power-bar display  
*SAV  
This command saves an instrument state.  
Syntax  
*SAV <integer>  
<integer> range is 1 to 4.  
Description  
The following constitutes an instrument state: single/continuous mea-  
surement mode, power bar on/off, vacuum/STD air mode, normal/fast  
up date, list by WL, list by Pwr, p eak, or avg disp lay mode, frequency  
units, p ower units, elevation, p eak excursion, p eak threshold, p ower  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
offset, signal- to- noise auto mode on/off, wavelength limit on/off, wave-  
length limit start, wavelength limit stop, and signal- to- noise average  
count.  
*SRE  
The *SRE (service request enable) command sets the bits in the service  
request enable register.  
*SRE <integer>  
*SRE?  
Syntax  
<integer> is defined as an integer mask from 0 to 255.  
Description  
The service request enable register contains a mask value for the bits  
to be enabled in the status byte register. A bit set to one in the service  
request enable register enables the corresponding bit in the status byte  
register to generate a service request. A zero disables the bit. The fol-  
lowing table lists the bits in the service request enable register and  
what they mask.  
The service request enable register is cleared when the instrument is  
turned on. The *RST and *CLS commands do not change the register.  
The *SRE? query returns the value of the service request enable regis-  
ter.  
Table 4-16. Service Request Enable Register  
Bita  
Bit Weight  
Enables  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
128  
64  
32  
16  
8
Not Used  
Not Used  
Event Status Bit (ESB)  
Message Available (MAV)  
Not Used  
4
Error queue status  
Not Used  
2
1
Not Used  
a. High enables the status byte register bit.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
Query Response  
Example  
<integer> from 0 to 63 or from 128 to 191.  
OUTPUT 720;*SRE 32”  
In this example, the command enables ESB (event summary) bit 5 in  
the status byte register to generate a service request.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*STB?  
The *STB (status byte) query returns the current value of the instru-  
ment’s status byte.  
*STB?  
Syntax  
Description  
The master summary status (MSS) bit 6 indicates whether or not the  
device has at least one reason for requesting service. When you read  
the status byte register, the value returned is the total of the bit  
weights of all of the bits set to one at the time you read the byte. The  
following table shows each bit in the status byte register and its bit  
weight. The *STB? query does not affect the contents of the status byte  
register.  
Table 4-17. Status Byte Register  
Bit  
Bit Weight  
Condition  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
128  
64  
32  
16  
8
Not Used  
Master Summary Status (MSS)  
Event Status Bit (ESB)  
Message Available (MAV)  
Not Used  
4
Error queue status  
Not Used  
2
1
Not Used  
Query Response  
Example  
<integer> from 0 to 255.  
OUTPUT 720;*STB?”  
ENTER 720;Value  
PRINT Value  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*TRG  
The *TRG (trigger) command is identical to the group execute trigger  
(GET) message or RUN command.  
*TRG  
Syntax  
Description  
This command acquires data according to the current settings. This  
command cannot be issued as a query. If a measurement is already in  
p rogress, a trigger is ignored, and an error is generated.  
Example  
The following example starts the data acquisition according to the cur-  
rent settings.  
OUTPUT 720;*TRG”  
*TST?  
The *TST (test) query starts a self- test on the instrument.  
*TST?  
Syntax  
Description  
The result of the test is p laced in the outp ut queue. A zero indicates  
the test p assed and a non- zero value indicates the test failed. The  
instrument will initiate a measurement and check for any hardware  
errors after the measurement is comp lete.  
Query Response  
Example  
<integer>  
OUTPUT 720;*TST?”  
ENTER 720;Result  
PRINT Result  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Common Commands  
*WAI  
The *WAI command prevents the instrument from executing any fur-  
ther commands until the current command has finished executing.  
*WAI  
Syntax  
Description  
All p ending op erations are comp leted during the wait p eriod. This  
command cannot be issued as a query.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
Measurement Instructions  
Use the measurement instructions documented in this section to per-  
form measurements and return the desired results to the comp uter.  
Four basic measurement instructions are used: CONFigure, FETCh,  
READ, and MEASure. Because the command trees for each of these  
four basic measurement instructions are identical, only the MEASure  
tree is documented.  
To p erform a measurement, ap p end to the measurement instruction a  
POWer or LENGth function. The POWer functions select power, fre-  
quency, wavelength, or wave number measurements.  
When the :SCALar command is used, data for a single measurement  
value is returned. When the :ARRay command is used, multip le data  
values are returned.  
The MEASure measurement instruction always acquires new measure-  
ment data. In order to obtain both wavelength and p ower values from  
the same measurement data, use two FETCh commands. This is shown  
in the following p rogram fragment:  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:CONT OFF;”  
OUTPUT 720;:CONF:ARR:POW MAX”  
OUTPUT 720;:INIT:IMM”  
OUTPUT 720;:FETC:ARR:POW?”  
ENTER 720:powers$  
OUTPUT 720;:FETC:ARR:POW:WAV?”  
ENTER 720:wavelengths$  
In the examp le above, the data in the p ower and wavelength arrays  
are returned in the same order so that p owers can be matched to  
wavelengths. You can also send a MEASure command followed by a  
FETCh command.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
{:MEASure | :READ[?] | :FETCh[?] | :CONFigure[?]}  
{:ARRay | [:SCALar] }  
:POWer[?]  
:FREQuency[?]  
:WAVelength[?]  
:WNUMber[?]  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
MEASure{:ARRay | [:SCALar]} :POWer?  
Returns amplitude values.  
Syntax  
:POWer? [<expected_value>[,<resolution>]]  
Used With  
<expected_value>  
<resolution>  
SCALar  
ARRay  
optional  
ignored  
ignored  
ignored  
Description  
When used with a :SCALar command, a single value is returned. The  
disp lay is p laced in the single- wavelength mode, and the marker is  
p laced on the signal having a p ower level that is closest to the  
<expected_value> p arameter.  
When used with an :ARRay command, an array of amp litudes is  
returned. The disp lay is p laced in the list- by- p ower mode.  
Returned values are in the current p ower units. Wavelength units are  
not affected.  
CONFigure command  
When this function is used with the CONFigure command, the query question  
mark character ?must not be included in the string. However, the FETCh, READ,  
and MEASure command are queries and require the question mark. Refer to the  
examples for this command.  
<expected_value> MAXimum  
Displays the highest power signal  
Constants  
MINimum  
Displays the lowest power signal  
DEFault  
Displays the signal at the current marker position  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
Examples  
:CONF:ARR:POW  
:FETC:ARR:POW?  
:READ:ARR:POW?  
:MEAS:ARR:POW?  
:CONF:SCAL:POW -10 dBm  
:FETC:SCAL:POW? MAX  
:READ:SCAL:POW? MIN  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW? DEF  
Query Response  
The following line is an examp le of a returned string when  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW? MAX is sent:  
-5.88346500E+000  
If six laser lines are located and :MEAS:ARR:POW? is sent, the follow-  
ing string could be returned. Notice that the first returned number  
indicates the number of laser- line values returned in the query. The  
measurement units are in dBm.  
6,-1.37444400E+001,-1.10996100E+001,-9.62396600E+000,  
-7.94024500E+000,-7.01303200E+000,-1.04536200E+001  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
MEASure{:ARRay | [:SCALar]} :POWer:FREQuen-  
cy?  
Returns frequency values.  
Syntax  
:POWer:FREQuency? [<expected_value>[,<resolution>]]  
Used With  
<expected_value>  
<resolution>  
SCALar  
ARRay  
optional  
ignoreda  
optional  
optional  
a. Although ignored, this argument must be present if the resolution argument is specified.  
Description  
When used with a :SCALar command, a single value is returned. The  
disp lay is p laced in the single- wavelength mode, and the marker is  
p laced on the signal having a frequency that is closest to the  
<expected_value> p arameter. Default units for <expected_value>  
p arameter are in Hz. When used with an :ARRay command, an array  
of frequencies is returned. The disp lay is p laced in the list- by-wave-  
length mode.  
The <resolution> parameter sets the resolution of the measurement. It  
is a unitless number whose value will be limited to either 0.01 or  
0.001 (whichever is closer). MAXimum resolution is equivalent to the  
FAST measurement update mode. MINimum resolution is equivalent to  
the NORMAL measurement up date mode.  
Returned values are in Hz (disp lay is in THz). Power units are not  
affected.  
CONFigure command  
When this function is used with the CONFigure command, the query question  
mark character ?must not be included in the string. However, the FETCh, READ,  
and MEASure command are queries and require the question mark. Refer to the  
examples for this command.  
<expected_value> MAXimum  
The highest frequency signal  
The lowest frequency signal  
Constants  
MINimum  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
DEFault  
The current marker position  
<resolution>  
Constants  
MAXimum  
MINimum  
DEFault  
0.01 resolution (fast update)  
0.001 resolution (normal)  
Current resolution  
Examples  
:CONF:ARR:POW:FREQ DEF, MIN  
:FETC:ARR:POW:FREQ? DEF, MAX  
:READ:ARR:POW:FREQ?  
:MEAS:ARR:POW:FREQ?  
:CONF:SCAL:POW:FREQ 230.8THZ, MAX  
:FETC:SCAL:POW:FREQ? 230.8THZ, MIN  
:READ:SCAL:POW:FREQ? 230.8THZ  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW:FREQ? 230.8THZ  
Query Response  
The following line is an examp le of a returned string when  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW:FREQ? MAX is sent:  
+1.94055176E+014  
If six laser lines are located and :MEAS:ARR:POW:FREQ? is sent, the  
following string is an examp le of the returned data. Notice that the  
first returned number indicates the number of laser- line values  
returned in the query.  
6,+1.94055100E+014,+1.93854100E+014,+1.93653000E+014,+1.93452000E+014,+1.93250900E+0  
14,+1.93050000E+014  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
MEASure{:ARRay | [:SCALar]} :POWer:WAVe-  
length?  
Returns wavelength values.  
:POWer:WAVelength? [<expected_value>[,<resolution>]]  
Syntax  
Used With  
<expected_value>  
<resolution>  
SCALar  
ARRay  
optional  
ignoreda  
optional  
optional  
a. Although ignored, this argument must be present if the resolution argument is specified.  
Description  
When used with a :SCALar command, a single value is returned. The  
disp lay is p laced in the single- wavelength mode, and the marker is  
p laced on the signal having a wavelength that is closest to the  
<expected_value> p arameter. Default units for <expected_value>  
parameter are in meters.  
When used with an :ARRay command, an array of wavelengths is  
returned. The disp lay is p laced in the list- by- wavelength mode.  
The <resolution> parameter sets the resolution of the measurement. It  
is a unitless number whose value will be limited to either 0.01 or  
0.001 (whichever is closer).  
Returned values are in meters. Displayed units are nanometers. Power  
units are not affected.  
CONFigure command  
When this function is used with the CONFigure command, the query question  
mark character ?must not be included in the string. However, the FETCh, READ,  
and MEASure command are queries and require the question mark. Refer to the  
examples for this command.  
<expected_value> MAXimum  
The highest wavelength signal  
The lowest wavelength signal  
The current marker position  
Constants  
MINimum  
DEFault  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
<resolution>  
Constants  
MAXimum  
MINimum  
DEFault  
0.01 resolution (fast update)  
0.001 resolution (normal)  
Current resolution  
Examples  
:CONF:ARR:POW:WAV DEF, MAX  
:FETC:ARR:POW:WAV? DEF, MIN  
:READ:ARR:POW:WAV?  
:MEAS:ARR:POW:WAV?  
:CONF:SCAL:POW:WAV 1300NM, MAX  
:FETC:SCAL:POW:WAV? 1300NM, MIN  
:READ:SCAL:POW:WAV? 1300NM  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW:WAV? 1300NM  
Query Response  
The following line is an examp le of a returned string when  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW:WAV? MAX is sent:  
+1.5529258E-006  
If six laser lines are located and :MEAS:ARR:POW:WAV? is sent, the  
following string could be returned. Notice that the first returned num-  
ber indicates the number of laser- line values returned in the query.  
6,+1.54488100E-006,+1.54648400E-006,+1.54809000E-006,+1.54969900E-006,+1.55131100E-  
006,+1.55292600E-006  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
MEASure{:ARRay | [:SCALar]} :POWer:WNUMber?  
Returns a wave number value.  
Syntax  
:POWer:WNUMber? [<expected_value>[,<resolution>]]  
Used With  
<expected_value>  
<resolution>  
SCALar  
ARRay  
optional  
ignoreda  
optional  
optional  
a. Although ignored, this argument must be present if the resolution argument is specified.  
Description  
When used with a :SCALar command, a single value is returned. The  
disp lay is p laced in the single- wavelength mode, and the marker is  
p laced on the signal having a wave number that is closest to the  
<expected_value> p arameter. Default units for <expected_value>  
parameter are in m–1.  
When used with an :ARRay command, an array of wave number is  
returned. The disp lay is p laced in the list- by- wavelength mode.  
The <resolution> parameter sets the resolution of the measurement. It  
is a unitless number whose value will be limited to either 0.01 or  
0.001 (whichever is closer).  
Returned values are in inverse meters. Displayed units are inverse  
centimeters. Power units are not affected.  
CONFigure command  
When this function is used with the CONFigure command, the query question  
mark character ?must not be included in the string. However, the FETCh, READ,  
and MEASure command are queries and require the question mark. Refer to the  
examples for this command.  
<expected_value> MAXimum  
The laser line having the largest wave number  
The laser line having the smallest wave number  
The current marker position  
Constants  
MINimum  
DEFault  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
Measurement Instructions  
<resolution>  
Constants  
MAXimum  
MINimum  
DEFault  
0.01 resolution (fast update)  
0.001 resolution (normal)  
Current resolution  
Examples  
:CONF:ARR:POW:WNUM DEF, MAX  
:FETC:ARR:POW:WNUM? DEF, MIN  
:READ:ARR:POW:WNUM?  
:MEAS:ARR:POW:WNUM?  
:CONF:SCAL:POW:WNUM 6451, MAX  
:FETC:SCAL:POW:WNUM? 6451, MIN  
:READ:SCAL:POW:WNUM? 6451  
:MEAS:SCAL:POW:WNUM? 6451  
Query Response  
If the :MEAS:SCAL:POW:WNUM? 6451 command is sent, and a 1550  
nm laser line is p resent, the following resp onse would be returned to  
the computer:  
+6.45286262E+005  
Notice that the returned units are m–1. If six laser lines are measured  
and :MEAS:ARR:POW:WNUM? is sent, the following resp onse is  
returned. Notice that the first returned number indicates the number  
of laser- line values returned in the query.  
6,+6.47298400E+005,+6.46627900E+005,+6.45957000E+005,+6.45286300E+005,+6.44615600E+0  
05,+6.43945300E+005  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
Use the CALCulate1 commands to query uncorrected frequency- sp ec-  
trum data. In NORMAL measurement up date mode, 15,047 values are  
returned. If the Agilent 86120C is set for FAST measurement up date  
mode (low resolution), 7,525 values are returned.  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
:CALCulate1  
:DATA?  
:TRANsform  
:FREQuency  
:POINts  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
DATA?  
Queries uncorrected frequency- sp ectrum data of the inp ut laser line.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate1:DATA?  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
The returned values are proportional to squared Watts (linear) units.  
No amp litude or frequency correction is ap p lied to the values. To  
obtain the logarithmic (dB) result, normalize the returned values by  
the largest value, then take five times the logarithm of the normalized  
values.  
Be p rep ared to p rocess a large amount of data when this query is  
sent. The amount of data returned depends on the measurement  
up date state of the instrument which can be set using the  
:CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts command or the resolution  
argument of an instrument function. Refer to “Measurement Instruc-  
tions” on page 4- 15.  
When NORMAL measurement update is sp ecified, over 250 kilobytes of  
data (15,047 values) can be returned to the comp uter. When  
FAST  
measurement update is specified, over 125 kilobytes of data (7,525 val-  
ues) can be returned.  
The following string is a typical example of the first few returned val-  
ues:  
+4.02646500E+001,+6.78125100E+001,+6.17986600E+001,+4.26768200E+001,+4.80245300E+00  
1,+3.10491300E+001,+1.13409400E+001,+5.07832500E+001,+2.77746200E+001,+3.89150500E+0  
01,+3.50217600E+001,+7.34649800E-001,+5.64983800E+000,  
Notice that only measurement values are returned to the comp uter.  
There is no first value that indicates the number of values contained  
in the string as there is, for examp le, with the FETCh, READ, and  
MEASure commands. Use the :CALCulate1:TRANsform:FRE-  
Quency:POINTs command to query the number of p oints the  
:CALC1:DATA? returns.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
When NORMAL measurement mode is selected, the uncorrected fre-  
quency domain data consists of 64K values. Only the frequency domain  
data corresp onding to 1270–1650 wavelength (in vacuum) is returned  
(15,047 values). In FAST measurement mode, the data consists of 32K  
values of which 7,525 values are returned.  
In NORMAL measurement mode, the frequency sp acing between values  
is uniform and is equal to 3.613378 GHz. Note that the sp acing  
between values is not uniform in wavelength units. The values  
returned are in ascending optical frequency.  
The first value of the uncorrected frequency data corresp onds to an  
optical frequency of 181.6915 THz (1650.008 nm). The last value of the  
uncorrected frequency data corresp onds to an op tical frequency of  
236.0584 THz (1269.993 nm). For examp le, a laser line p eak located  
at the 3,000th returned value has an op tical frequency of:  
frequency = 181,6915 THz + 2, 999(3,613378 GHz)  
= 192,5280 THz  
or, 1557.137 nm (in vacuum).  
When FAST measurement mode is selected, the frequency spacing  
between elements is uniform and is equal to 7.226756 GHz. Note the  
spacing between values is not uniform in wavelength units. The values  
returned are in ascending optical frequency. Only the frequency  
domain data corresponding to 1270–1650 wavelength (in vacuum) is  
returned (7,525 values). The first value of the uncorrected frequency  
data corresponds to an optical frequency of 181.6879 THz (1650.041  
nm). The last value of the uncorrected frequency data corresp onds to  
an optical frequency of 236.0620 THz (1269.974 nm). For example, a  
laser line peak located at the 1500th returned value has an optical fre-  
quency of:  
frequency = 181,6879 THz + 1, 499(7,226756 GHz)  
= 192,5208 THz  
or, 1557.195 nm (in vacuum).  
If your program is aborted or interrupted after sending this query, the  
Agilent 86120C continues to p rocess the data but does not p lace it in  
the outp ut buffer. Because of the amount of data p rocessed, the  
instrument will not respond to any new commands in its inp ut buffer  
for up to 20 seconds.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
This query will generate a “Settings conflict” error if the instrument is  
in the signal- to-noise average ap p lication.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts  
Sets the size of the fast Fourier transform (FFT) p erformed by the  
instrument.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts{?| {<integer> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<integer> Sets FFT size. Must be either 15,047 or 7,525. Other values  
result in an error.  
Constant  
Description  
7,525  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
15,047  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: array size set to 15,047  
*RST State: 15,047  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
A NORMAL up dated disp lay corresp onds to an FFT size of 15,047. A  
FAST up dated disp lay corresp onds to an FFT size of 7,525. These val-  
ues are a subset of the uncorrected- data buffer shown in the figure  
that is located in “Making Measurements” on page 3-5. Changing the  
number of points causes the instrument to reprocess the current set of  
data.  
The query form of the command returns the number of points in the  
data set. This is the number of measurement points that will be  
returned by the CALC1:DATA? query.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate1 Subsystem  
Query Response  
For normal update:  
+15,047  
For fast update:  
+7,525  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
Use the CALCulate2 commands to query corrected values frequency-  
spectrum data.  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
:CALCulate2  
:DATA?  
:PEXCursion  
:POINts?  
:PTHReshold  
:PWAVerage  
[:STATe]  
:WLIMit  
[:STATe]  
:STARt  
:FREQuency  
[:WAVelength]  
:WNUMber  
:STOP  
:FREQuency  
[:WAVelength]  
:WNUMber  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
DATA?  
Queries the corrected peak data of the input laser line.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:DATA? {FREQuency | POWer | WAVelength | WNUMber}  
Constant  
Description  
FREQuency  
Queries the array of laser-line frequencies after the peak search is  
completed. If :CALC2:PWAV:STAT is on, the power-weighted  
average frequency is returned.  
POWer  
Queries the array of laser-line powers after the peak search is  
completed. If :CALC2:PWAV:STAT is on, the total input power is  
returned.  
WAVelength  
WNUMber  
Queries the array of laser-line wavelengths after the peak search  
is completed. If :CALC2:PWAV:STAT is on, the power-weighted  
average wavelength is returned.  
Queries the array of laser-line wave numbers after the peak  
search is completed. If :CALC2:PWAV:STAT is on, the power-  
weighted average wave number is returned.  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
Use the CALC2:POIN? query to determine the number of points the  
CALC2:DATA? query will return. The following string is a typical  
example of the first few returned values when WAVelength is specified:  
+1.54488600E-006,+1.54649100E-006,+1.54808300E-006,+1.54969600E-006,+1.55131200E-  
006,+1.55293000E-006  
This next string resulted by sp ecifying the WNUMber argument:  
+6.47296600E+005,+6.46625000E+005,+6.45959900E+005,+6.45287500E+005,+6.44615500E+00  
5,+6.43943900E+005  
Notice that only measurement values are returned to the comp uter.  
There is no first value that indicates the number of values contained  
in the string as there is, for examp le, with the FETCh, READ, and  
MEASure commands.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
When there is no input signal, the POWer query returns –200 dBm; the  
WAVelength query returns 100 nm (1.0E–7).  
PEXCursion  
Sets the peak excursion limit used by the Agilent 86120C to determine  
valid laser line peaks.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:PEXCursion{?| {<integer> | MINimum | MAXimum | DEFault}}  
<integer> represents logarithmic units in dB. Valid range is 1 to 30 dB.  
Constant  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
DEFault  
Description  
1 dB  
30 dB  
15 dB  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 15 dB  
*RST State: 15 dB  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
A laser line is identified as a valid p eak if its amp litude is greater  
than the p eak excursion p lus the amp litudes of the closest local min-  
ima on either side of the p eak. This command works in conjunction  
with the p eak threshold setting. Refer to “PTHReshold” on p age 4- 34 .  
Changing the p eak excursion limit causes the instrument to rep rocess  
the current set of data. Refer also to “Defining Laser- Line Peaks” on  
page 2- 15.  
The query resp onse is the current value. For examp le, if the current  
value is set to 15 dB, the following value is returned:  
15  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
POINts?  
Queries the number of points in the data set.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:POINts?  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected  
*RST State: unaffected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query Only  
Description  
This is the number of p oints that will be returned by the  
CALC2:DATA? query.  
Query Response  
For examp le, if six laser lines are located:  
+6  
PTHReshold  
Sets the p eak threshold limit used by the instrument to determine  
valid laser line peaks.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:PTHReshold{?| {<integer> | MINimum | MAXimum | DEFault}}  
<integer> rep resents logarithmic units in dB. Valid range is 0 to 40.  
Constant  
Value  
0 dB  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
40 dB  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
DEFault  
10 dB  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 10 dB  
*RST State: 10 dB  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
A laser line is identified as a valid p eak if its amp litude is above the  
maximum amp litude minus the p eak threshold value. The subtraction  
is done in dB units. This setting works in conjunction with the peak  
excursion setting to determine which responses are located. Refer to  
“PEXCursion” on page 4- 33. Changing the p eak threshold limit causes  
the instrument to rep rocess the current set of data. Refer also to  
“Defining Laser- Line Peaks” on page 2- 15.  
The query resp onse is the current value. For examp le, if the current  
value is set to 15 dB, the following value is returned:  
15  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
PWAVerage[:STATe]  
Places the instrument in the power- weighted average mode.  
:CALCulate2:PWAVerage[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
Description  
When the state is on, the CALC2:DATA? POW query returns the total  
power and the CALC2:DATA? WAV, FREQ, or WNUM query returns the  
power- weighted average wavelength, frequency, or wave number val-  
ues.  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
Turning power- weighted average mode on while making delta, Fabry-  
Perot, or signal- to- noise measurements results in a “–221 Settings con-  
flict” error.  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit[:STATe]  
Turns wavelength limiting on and off.  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: on  
*RST State: on  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When this function is on, the Agilent 86120C has an input range from  
the WLIMit STARt to the WLIMit STOP. When this function is off, the  
instrument displays peaks over the full wavelength range. The graphics  
disp lay always shows the range between WLIMit:STARt and  
WLIMit:STOP, regardless of the state of this command.  
Whenever the Agilent 86120C receives this command, it rep rocesses  
the data and p erforms a new p eak search.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit:STARt:FREQuency  
Sets the start frequency for the wavelength limit range.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:FREQuency {?|{<real> | MINimum | MAXimum }}  
<real> is a frequency value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
181.6924 THz (1650 nm)  
wavelength limit stop value  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 181.6924 THz  
*RST State: 181.6924 THz  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the starting range for the wavelength limit in hertz.  
The start frequency value must be less than or equal to the stop fre-  
quency value or the start frequency will be clip p ed to the stop fre-  
quency and a “Data out of range” error will be generated. The default  
units for the <real> p arameter are hertz.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit:STARt[:WAVelength]  
Syntax  
CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt[:WAVelength] {?|{<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a wavenumber value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
1270 nm  
wavelength limit stop value  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 1270 nm  
*RST State: 1270 nm  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the starting range for the wavelength limit. The start  
wavelength value must be less than or equal to the stop wavelength  
value or the start wavelength will be clipped to the stop wavelength and  
a “Data out of range” error will be generated. Setting the start  
wavelength is equivalent to setting the stop frequency/wavenumber  
because of the inverse relationship of frequency to wavelength. The  
default units for the <real> p arameter are meters.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit:STARt:WNUMber  
Sets the starting wavenumber for the wavelength limit range.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STARt:WNUMber {?|{<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a wavenumber value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
6060 cm-1 (1650 nm)  
wavelength limit stop value  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 6.060606E5 m-1  
*RST State: 6.060606E5 m-1  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the starting range for the wavelength limit. The  
default units for the <real> p arameter value are m -1. The start wave-  
number value must be less than or equal to the stop wavenumber  
value or the start wavenumber will be clipped to the stop wavenumber  
and a “Data out of range” error will be generated.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit:STOP:FREQuency  
Sets the stopping frequency for the wavelength limit range.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:FREQuency {?|{<real> | MINimum | MAXimum }}  
<real> is a frequency value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
start wavelength limit  
236.0571 THz (1270 nm)  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 236.0571 THz  
*RST State: 236.0571 THz  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the stopping range for the wavelength limit. The  
default units for the <real> p arameter are Hz. The stop frequency  
value must be greater than or equal to the start frequency value or the  
stop frequency will be clipped to the start frequency and a “Data out  
of range” error will be generated.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit:STOP[:WAVelength]  
Sets the stop p ing wavelength for the wavelength limit range.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP[:WAVelength] {?|{<real> | MINimum | MAXimum }}  
<real> is a wavelength value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
start wavelength limit  
1650.0 nm  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 1650 nm  
*RST State: 1650 nm  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the stopping range for the wavelength limit. The  
default units for the <real> parameter are meters. The stop wavelength  
value must be greater than or equal to the start wavelength value or  
the stop wavelength will be clipped to the start wavelength and a  
“Data out of range” error will be generated. Setting the start wave-  
length is equivalent to setting the start frequency/wavenumber because  
of the inverse relationship of frequency to wavelength.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate2 Subsystem  
WLIMit:STOP:WNUMber  
Sets the stop p ing wavenumber for the wavelength limit range.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate2:WLIMit:STOP:WNUMber {?|{<real> | MINimum | MAXimum }}  
<real> is a wavenumber value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
start wavelength limit  
7874 cm-1 (1270 nm)  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: 7.87401E5 m-1  
*RST State: 7.87401E5 m-1  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the stopping range for the wavelength limit. The  
default units for the <real> p arameter are inverse meters. The stop  
wavenumber value must be less than or equal to the start wavenumber  
value or the stop wavenumber will be clipped to the start wavenumber  
and a “Data out of range” error will be generated.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
Use the CALCulate3 commands to perform delta, drift, signal- to- noise,  
and Fabry- Perot measurements. The commands in this subsystem have  
the following command hierarchy:  
:CALCulate3  
:ASNR  
:CLEar  
:COUNt  
[:STATe]  
:DATA?  
:DELTa  
:POWer  
[:STATe]  
:PRESet  
:REFerence  
:FREQuency  
:POWer?  
[:WAVelength]  
:WNUMber  
:WAVelength  
[:STATe]  
:WPOWer  
[:STATe]  
:DRIFt  
:DIFFerence  
[:STATe]  
:MAXimum  
[:STATe]  
:MINimum  
[:STATe]  
:PRESet  
:REFerence  
:RESet  
[:STATe]  
[:STATe]  
4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
:FPERot  
[:STATE]  
:FWHM  
[:WAVelength]?  
:FREQuency?  
:WNUMber?  
:MEAN  
[:WAVelength]?  
:FREQuency?  
:WNUMber?  
:MODE  
[:WAVelength]?  
:FREQuency?  
:WNUMber?  
:PEAK  
[:WAVelength]?  
:FREQuency?  
:WNUMber?  
:POWer?  
:POWer  
[:WAVelength]?  
:FREQuency?  
:WNUMber?  
:SIGMa  
[:WAVelength]?  
:FREQuency?  
:WNUMber?  
:POINts?  
:PRESet  
:SNR  
:AUTO  
:REFerence  
:FREQuency  
[:WAVelength]  
:WNUMber  
[:STATe]  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
ASNR:CLEar  
Clears the number of measurements used in the average signal- to-  
noise calculation.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:ASNR:CLEar  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command clears the number of measurements used in the average  
signal- to- noise calculation. The current measurement is used as the  
new reference for the average signal- to- noise calculation.  
4-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
ASNR:COUNt  
Sets the number of measurements to be used for the average signal- to-  
noise calculation.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:ASNR:COUNt {?|{<integer> | MINimum | MAXimum }}  
<integer> is a value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
10  
900  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: 100  
*RST State: 100  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command sets the number of measurements to be used for the  
average signal- to- noise calculation. If this count is changed while the  
average signal calculation is on, and the new count is less than the  
number of measurements already taken, the instrument will go into  
single measurement mode.  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
ASNR[:STATe]  
Turns the average signal- to- noise ratio on or off.  
:CALCulate3:ASNR[:STATe] {?|{ ON | OFF | 1 | 0 }}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
This command turns the average signal- to- noise calculation on or off.  
Only one of the CALCulate3 calculations (ASNR, DELTa, DRIFt, or  
SNR) can be turned on at a time. Turning on the ASNR calculation  
while another calculation is on will generate a “Settings conflict” error.  
When the calculation is first turned on, the lines measured in the cur-  
rent measurement will be used as the reference values for the signal-  
to-noise ratio. Subsequent measurements will average the noise values.  
The signal values are not updated until the number of measurements  
used to average the noise is greater than or equal to the COUNt value.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DATA?  
Queries the data resulting from delta, drift, and signal- to- noise mea-  
surements.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DATA? {POWer | FREQuency | WAVelength | WNUMber}  
Argument  
POWer  
Description  
Queries the array of laser-line powers after the calculation is  
completed.  
FREQuency  
WAVelength  
WNUMber  
Queries the array of laser-line frequencies after the calculation is  
completed.  
Queries the array of laser-line wavelengths after the calculation is  
completed.  
Queries the array of laser-line wave numbers after the calculation  
is completed.  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
The data returned by the query dep ends up on which calculation state  
is on. If no calculation state is on, an error is generated. The returned  
data is comma delimited. The following string is a typ ical examp le of  
six values returned when POWer is sp ecified from a delta p ower mea-  
surement:  
-7.42833100E+000,-1.00087200E+000,-2.52121400E+000,  
-3.41918900E+000,-3.80437200E+000,-6.36282900E+000  
Notice that only measurement values are returned to the comp uter.  
There is no first value that indicates the number of values contained  
in the string as there is, for examp le, with the FETCh, READ, and  
MEASure commands. Use the CALC3:POIN? query to determine the  
number of points the CALC3:DATA? query returns.  
In the SNR or ASNR calculation, only the POWer argument is valid.  
The other arguments will generate a “Settings conflict” error. Use the  
CALC2:DATA? query to retrieve the signal wavelengths and powers.  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DELTa:POWer[:STATe]  
Turns the delta-power measurement mode on and off.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:POWer[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When this state is on, the p ower of the reference laser line is sub-  
tracted from the p ower values of all laser lines excep t the reference.  
The p ower data returned by the CALC3:DATA? query is the array of  
laser line power levels normalized to the power level of the reference  
laser line. The power of the reference laser line is returned as an  
absolute p ower (unnormalized). The frequency data returned is the  
array of absolute frequency values.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
DELTa:PRESet  
Turns off all delta measurement states.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:PRESet  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
4-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DELTa:REFerence:FREQuency  
Selects the reference laser line for DELTa calculations.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence:FREQuency{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a frequency value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
181.6924 THz  
236.0571 THz  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: 236.0571 THz (1270 nm)  
*RST State: 236.0571 THz (1270 nm)  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
The reference will be the laser line at the frequency closest to the fre-  
quency entered. Subsequent measurements will use the frequency clos-  
est to the reference frequency used for the previous measurement.  
The query returns the reference laser line’s frequency. The default  
units for the <real> p arameter are Hz.  
DELTa:REFerence:POWer?  
Queries the reference laser line’s power level.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence:POWer?  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query Only  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DELTa:REFerence[:WAVelength]  
Selects the reference laser line for DELTa calculations.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence[:WAVelength]{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a wavelength value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
1270 nm  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
1650 nm  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: 1270 nm (236.0571 THz)  
*RST State: 1270 nm (236.0571 THz) laser line  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
The reference will be the laser line at the wavelength closest to the  
wavelength entered. Subsequent measurements will use the wavelength  
closest to the reference wavelength used for the previous measurement.  
The query returns the current wavelength of the reference laser line.  
The default units for the <real> parameter are meters.  
4-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DELTa:REFerence:WNUMber  
Selects the reference laser line for delta calculations.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:REFerence:WNUMber{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a wave number value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
6,060 cm-1 (1650 nm)  
7,824 cm-1 (1270 nm)  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: 7,824 cm-1 (1270 nm)  
*RST State: 7,824 cm-1 (1270 nm)  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
The reference will be the laser line at the wave number closest to the  
wave number entered. Subsequent measurements will use the wave  
number closest to the reference wave number used for the p revious  
measurement.  
The query returns the current wave number of the reference laser line.  
–1  
The default units for the <real> p arameter are m  
.
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DELTa:WAVelength[:STATe]  
Turns the delta wavelength measurement mode on and off.  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:WAVelength[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When on, the wavelength of the reference laser line is subtracted from  
the wavelength values of all laser lines excep t the reference.  
For the CALC3:DATA? query, the p ower data returned is the array of  
absolute p owers measured for each laser line. The frequency data is  
the array of frequency values normalized to the frequency of the refer-  
ence laser line. The frequency of the reference laser line is returned as  
an absolute frequency (unnormalized).  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DELTa:WPOWer[:STATe]  
Turns the delta wavelength and power measurement mode on and off.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DELTa:WPOWer[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When on, the wavelength of the reference laser line is subtracted from  
the wavelength values of all laser lines excep t the reference. The  
power value of the reference is subtracted from the power values of all  
laser lines except the reference.  
For the CALC3:DATA? query, the p ower data returned is the array of  
powers normalized to the power of the reference laser line. The power  
of the reference laser line is returned as an absolute p ower (unnor-  
malized).  
The frequency data is the array of frequency values normalized to the  
frequency of the reference laser line. The frequency of the reference  
laser line is returned as an absolute frequency (unnormalized).  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DRIFt:DIFFerence[:STATe]  
Sets the drift calculation to subtract the minimum values measured  
from the maximum values measured.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:DIFFerence[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
Use the CALC3:DRIF:PRES command to turn off all the drift states  
before turning on this state. The CALC3:DATA? query returns the max-  
imum p ower and frequency minus the minimum p ower and frequency.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DRIFt:MAXimum[:STATe]  
Sets the drift calculation to return the maximum power and frequency  
values measured.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:MAXimum[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
Use the CALC3:DRIF:PRES command to turn off all the drift states  
before turning on this state. The CALC3:DATA? query returns the max-  
imum p ower and frequency.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DRIFt:MINimum[:STATe]  
Sets the drift calculation to return the minimum p ower and frequency  
values measured.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:MINimum[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
Use the CALC3:DRIF:PRES command to turn off all the drift states  
before turning on this state. The CALC3:DATA? query returns the min-  
imum p ower or frequency.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DRIFt:PRESet  
Turns off all the drift states for DIFFerence, MAXimum, MINimum, and  
REFerence.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:PRESet  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
*RST State: unaffected by  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
Description  
This command allows the CALC3:DATA? query to return the difference  
between the current measurement and the reference.  
DRIFt:REFerence:RESet  
Places the current list of laser lines into the reference list.  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:REFerence:RESet  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
*RST State: unaffected by  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DRIFt:REFerence[:STATe]  
Turns on and off the drift reference state.  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt:REFerence[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When this command is set to on, the CALC3:DATA? command returns  
the reference laser lines. Use the CALC3:DRIF:PRES command to turn  
off all the drift states before turning on the drift reference state.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
DRIFt[:STATe]  
Turns on and off the drift measurement calculation.  
:CALCulate3:DRIFt[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When the drift mode is first turned on, the current list of laser lines is  
placed into the reference. All subsequent measurements take the new  
data, subtract the reference data, and disp lay the differences in wave-  
lengths and powers.  
The CALC3:DATA? query returns the power and frequency of the cur-  
rent measurement minus the p ower and frequency of the reference.  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
FPERot[:STATE]  
Turns on and off the Fabry- Perot measurement mode.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot[:STATE] {? | {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
When the state is ON, the Agilent 86120C measures characteristics of  
the Fabry- Perot laser modes. The modes are defined by the peak  
excursion and peak threshold commands.  
FPERot:FWHM?  
Queries the full width half- maximum data of the selected modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:FWHM{[:WAVelength] | :FREQuency | :WNUMber}?  
Syntax  
Argument  
Description  
WAVelength  
Returns the full width half-maximum wavelength of the selected  
modes.  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
Returns the full width half-maximum frequency of the selected  
modes.  
Returns the full width half-maximum wavenumber of the selected  
modes.  
Example Query  
Response  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
+5.47128800E009  
+6.93436400E+011  
+2.31306200E+001  
4-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query only  
FPERot:MEAN?  
Queries the mean data of the selected modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MEAN{[:WAVelength] | :FREQuency | :WNUMber}?  
Syntax  
Argument  
Description  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
Returns the mean wavelength of the selected modes.  
Returns the mean frequency of the selected modes.  
Returns the mean wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Example Query  
Response  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
+1.53878000E-006  
+1.94824800E+014  
+6.49865400E+003  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
Query only  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
FPERot:MODE:SPACing?  
Queries the mode spacing data of the selected modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:MODE:SPACing{[:WAVelength] | :FREQuency | :WNUMber}?  
Syntax  
Argument  
Description  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
Returns the mode spacing wavelength of the selected modes.  
Returns the mode spacing frequency of the selected modes.  
Returns the mode spacing wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Example Query  
Response  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
+3.18277200E010  
+4.02787400E+011  
+1.34356200E+001  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query only  
4-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
FPERot:PEAK?  
Queries the peak data of the selected modes.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:PEAK{[:WAVelength] | :FREQuency | :WNUMber | :POWer{[:DBM]|:WATTs}}?  
Argument  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
POWer  
Description  
Returns the peak wavelength of the selected modes.  
Returns the peak frequency of the selected modes.  
Returns the peak wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Returns the peak amplitude of the selected modes in dBm or  
watts.  
Example Query  
Response  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
POWer  
+1.54073400E006  
+1.94577600E+014  
+6.49041000E+003  
9.09446600E+000 (dBm)  
+1.23183800E004 (watts)  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query only  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
FPERot:POWer?  
Queries the total power data of the selected modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:POWer{[:DBM]|:WATTs}}?  
Syntax  
Argument  
DBM  
Description  
Returns the total power in dBm.  
Returns the total power in watts.  
WATTs  
Example Query  
Response  
dBm (DBM)  
4.46895600E+000  
+3.57358800E004  
watts (WATTs)  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query only  
4-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
FPERot:SIGMa?  
Queries the sigma data of the selected modes.  
:CALCulate3:FPERot:SIGMa{[:WAVelength] | :FREQuency | :WNUMber}?  
Syntax  
Argument  
Description  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
Returns the sigma wavelength of the selected modes.  
Returns the sigma frequency of the selected modes.  
Returns the sigma wavenumber of the selected modes.  
Example Query  
Response  
WAVelength  
FREQuency  
WNUMber  
+2.32784700E009  
+2.94452900E+011  
+9.82124900E+000  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
*RST State: not affected  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query only  
4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
POINts?  
Queries the number of points in the data set.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:POINts?  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
RST State: unaffected by  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query Only  
Description  
The value returned is the number of points returned by the  
CALC3:DATA? query.  
PRESet  
Turns off any CALCulate3 calculation that is on.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:PRESet  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
RST State: unaffected by  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
Description  
This command turns off any CALCulate3 calculation (delta, drift,  
Fabry- Perot, or signal- to- noise) that is on.  
4-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
SNR:AUTO  
Selects the reference frequency value for measuring noise in the sig-  
nal- to- noise calculation.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:SNR:AUTO{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Constant  
ON  
Description  
Selects internally generated reference frequency.  
Selects user-entered reference frequency.  
OFF  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: on  
*RST State: on  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
The command argument allows you to select either an internally gen-  
erated or a user- entered frequency reference for measuring the noise.  
To enter a value to use as the reference, use the SNR:REFerence:FRE-  
Quency, SNR:REFerence:WAVelength, and SNR:REFerence:WNUMber  
commands.  
4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
SNR:REFerence:FREQuency  
Enters a frequency that can be used for the noise measurement refer-  
ence in signal-to- noise calculations.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence:FREQuency{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a frequency value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
181.6924 THz  
236.0571 THz  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
*RST State: 193.4145 THz (1550.0 nm in a vacuum)  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
After entering this value, use the SNR:AUTO command to configure the  
instrument to use this value in subsequent signal- to- noise calculations.  
The default units for the <real> p arameter are Hz.  
4-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
SNR:REFerence[:WAVelength]  
Sets the wavelength used for the noise measurement reference in the  
signal- to- noise calculation.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence[:WAVelength]{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a wavelength value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
1270 nm  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
1650 nm  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
*RST State: 1550.0 nm in a vacuum  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
After entering this value, use the SNR:AUTO command to configure the  
instrument to use this value in subsequent signal- to- noise calculations.  
The number entered is converted internally to the corresponding fre-  
quency.  
The default units for the <real> parameter are meters.  
4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
SNR:REFerence:WNUMber  
Sets the wave number used for the noise measurement reference in the  
signal- to- noise calculation.  
Syntax  
:CALCulate3:SNR:REFerence:WNUMber{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is a wave number value that is within the following limits:  
Constant  
Description  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
6060 cm-1 (1650 nm)  
7874 cm-1 (1270 nm)  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: unaffected by  
*RST State: 6451.614 cm-1 (1550 nm)  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
After entering this value, use the SNR:AUTO command to configure the  
instrument to use this value in subsequent signal- to- noise calculations.  
The wave number entered is converted internally to the corresponding  
frequency.  
–1  
The default units for the <real> p arameter are m  
.
4-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CALCulate3 Subsystem  
SNR[:STATe]  
Turns the signal-to- noise calculation on and off.  
:CALCulate3:SNR[:STATe]{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: off  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Note  
Only one STATe command can be turned on at any one time. Attempting to turn  
more than one state on at a time results in a “–221 Settings Conflicterror. Refer  
to Measure delta, drift, and signal-to-noiseon page 3-14 for additional informa-  
tion on selecting measurements.  
4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CONFigure Measurement Instruction  
CONFigure Measurement Instruction  
For information on the CONFigure measurement instruction, refer to  
“Measurement Instructions” on page 4- 15.  
4-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
DISPlay Subsystem  
DISPlay Subsystem  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
:DISPlay  
:MARKer:  
:MAXimum  
:LEFT  
:NEXT  
:PREVious  
:RIGHt  
[:WINDow]  
:GRAPhics  
:STATe  
4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
DISPlay Subsystem  
MARKer:MAXimum  
Sets the marker to the laser line that has the maximum p ower.  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
*RST State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT  
Moves the marker left to the next laser line.  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:LEFT  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
*RST State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
Description  
Moves the marker from the current marker p osition to the next laser  
line having the following characteristic:  
• shorter wavelength  
• lower frequency  
• lower wave number  
If the display is in the List by Ampl mode, it will be changed to List by  
WL before the marker is moved.  
4-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
DISPlay Subsystem  
MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT  
Moves the marker to the laser line with the next lower power level.  
Syntax  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:NEXT  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
*RST State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
Description  
If the display is in the List by WL mode, it will be changed to List by  
Ampl before the marker is moved.  
MARKer:MAXimum:PREVious  
Moves the marker to the laser line that has the next higher power  
level.  
Syntax  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:PREVious  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
*RST State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
Description  
If the display is in the List by WL mode, it will be changed to List by  
Ampl before the marker is moved.  
4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
DISPlay Subsystem  
MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt  
Moves the marker right to the next laser line.  
:DISPlay:MARKer:MAXimum:RIGHt  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
*RST State: marker set to maximum- p ower laser line  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Command Only  
Description  
Moves the marker from the current marker p osition to the next laser  
line having the following characteristic:  
• longer wavelength  
• higher frequency  
• higher wave number  
If the display is in the List by Ampl mode, it will be changed to List by  
WL before the marker is moved.  
[WINDow]:GRAPhics:STATe  
Turns on and off the disp lay of the p ower bars.  
:DISPlay[:WINDow]:GRAPhics:STATe{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: on  
*RST State: on  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Description  
Sp ecifying on disp lays the p ower bars in all modes excep t the drift  
and signal- to- noise modes. Sp ecifying off p revents the disp lay of  
power bars for all instrument modes.  
4-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
FETCh Measurement Instruction  
FETCh Measurement Instruction  
For information on the FETCh measurement instruction, refer to “Mea-  
surement Instructions” on page 4- 15.  
4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
HCOPy Subsystem  
HCOPy Subsystem  
Use the command in this subsystem to p rint the disp layed measure-  
ment results to a p rinter. This subsystem has the following command  
hierarchy:  
:HCOPy  
[:IMMediate]  
[:IMMediate]  
Prints measurement results on a p rinter.  
:HCOPy:IMMediate  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Command Only  
Description  
Connect the printer to the Agilent 86120C’s rear- panel PARALLEL  
PRINTER PORT connector. The output to the printer is ASCII text.  
4-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
MEASure Measurement Instruction  
MEASure Measurement Instruction  
For information on the MEASure measurement instruction, refer to  
“Measurement Instructions” on page 4- 15.  
4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
READ Measurement Instruction  
READ Measurement Instruction  
For information on the READ measurement instruction, refer to “Mea-  
surement Instructions” on page 4- 15.  
4-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
SENSe Subsystem  
Use the SENSe commands to correct measurement results for elevation  
above sea level and to select between measurements in air or vacuum.  
You can also enter an amp litude offset. The commands in this sub-  
system have the following command hierarchy:  
[:SENSe]  
:CORRection  
:DEVice  
:ELEVations  
:MEDium  
:OFFSet  
[:MAGNitude]  
:DATA?  
4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
CORRection:DEVice  
Selects the wavelength measurement algorithm.  
:SENSe:CORRection:[DEVice]{?| {NARRow | BROad}}  
Syntax  
Constant  
NARRow  
Description  
Selects wavelength measurements for narrowband devices such  
as DFB lasers and modes of FP lasers.  
BROad  
Selects wavelength measurements for broadband devices such  
as optical filters and LEDs.  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: NARRow  
*RST sets this value to NARRow  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
The narrow bandwidth algorithm, used for measuring lasers, deter-  
mines the wavelength based up on the p eak.  
The broad bandwidth algorithm, used for LEDs, filters, and chirp ed  
lasers, determines the wavelength based up on the center- of- mass of  
the power spectrum. The peak excursion function is used to determine  
the value of the integration limits. Care must be taken to ensure that  
the integration limits are above any noise. This is especially true when  
measuring devices with sloping noise floors, like an EDFA amplifier.  
For more information on peak excursion, refer to “PEXCursion” on  
page 4- 33.  
Instrument specifications apply when the device is set to NARRow.  
Specifications do not apply in BROad mode.  
Query Response  
The query form returns the p reviously selected device.  
NARRow  
4-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
CORRection:ELEVation  
Sets the elevation value used by the instrument to comp ensate for air  
dispersion.  
Syntax  
:SENSe:CORRection:ELEVation{?| {<integer> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<integer> is the altitude in meters.  
Constant  
Description  
0 m  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
5000 m  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: unaffected by  
*RST sets this value to the minimum.  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
0Description  
Changing the elevation value causes the current data to be rep ro-  
cessed.  
Query Response  
The query form returns the current elevation setting as shown in the  
following example:  
+1500  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
CORRection:MEDium  
Sets the Agilent 86120C to return wavelength readings in a vacuum or  
standard air.  
Syntax  
:SENSe:CORRection:MEDium{?| {AIR | VACuum}}  
Argument  
AIR  
Description  
Selects wavelength values in standard air.  
Selects wavelength values in a vacuum.  
VACuum  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: VAC  
*RST State: VAC  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Description  
Standard air is defined to have the following characteristics:  
Barometric pressure: 760 torr  
Temperature:  
Relative humidity: 0%  
15°C  
4-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude]  
Enters an offset for amp litude values.  
Syntax  
:SENSe:CORRection:OFFSet:MAGNitude{?| {<real> | MINimum | MAXimum}}  
<real> is the logarithmic units in dB.  
Constant  
Description  
40.0 dB  
40.0 dB  
MINimum  
MAXimum  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: 0.0  
*RST State: 0.0  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Response  
The query form returns the current offset setting as shown in the fol-  
lowing example:  
+5.00000000E+000  
4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
DATA?  
Queries the time domain samp les of the inp ut laser line.  
Syntax  
:SENSe:DATA?  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query Only  
Description  
Be p rep ared to p rocess a large amount of data when this query is  
sent. The amount of data returned depends on the measurement  
update state of the instrument which is set using the resolution argu-  
ment of an instrument function. Refer to “Measurement Instructions”  
on page 4- 15.  
When NORMAL measurement up date is sp ecified, over 2,200 kilobytes  
of data (217 values) can be returned to the comp uter. When  
surement up date is sp ecified, over 1,100 kilobytes of data (2  
can be returned.  
FAST mea-  
16  
values)  
The floating point values are scaled from 1.000 to 1.999756 (1 + 4095/  
4096). Amplitude values are not calibrated.  
The input laser line(s) generate an interference pattern on the photo-  
detector as a function of the Michelson interferometer optical path  
delay. The time domain data is samp led at uniform op tical p ath delay  
increments of the reference laser wavelength, or 0.632991 microns.  
When NORMAL measurement update is selected, the first data value is  
samp led at –41.48 mm op tical p ath delay, and the last value is sam-  
pled at +41.48 mm optical path delay. When FAST measurement update  
is selected, the first data value is samp led at +20.74 mm op tical p ath  
delay, and the last value is samp led at –20.74 mm op tical p ath delay.  
The data value that corresp onds to zero op tical p ath delay is ap p roxi-  
mately, but not exactly, located in the center of the time domain data.  
If your program is aborted or interrupted after sending this query, the  
Agilent 86120C continues to p rocess the data but does not p lace it in  
the outp ut buffer. Because of the amount of data p rocessed, the  
instrument will not respond to any new commands in its inp ut buffer  
for 30 or 40 seconds.  
4-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SENSe Subsystem  
Query Response  
The following string shows an example of the first few measurements  
returned by this query.  
+1.51367200E+000,+1.51855500E+000,+1.49902300E+000,+1.47949200E+000,+1.50488300E+00  
0,+1.53320300E+000,+1.50097700E+000,+1.47265600E+000,+1.50293000E+000,+1.50781300E+0  
00,+1.51171900E+000,+1.48242200E+000,+1.50097700E+000,+1.51855500E+000,+1.50683600E+  
000,+1.48632800E+000,+1.50488300E+000  
Notice that only values are returned to the computer. There is no first  
value that indicates the number of values contained in the string as  
there is, for example, with the FETCh, READ, and MEASure com-  
mands.  
4-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
STATus Subsystem  
Use the commands in this subsystem to control the Agilent 86120C’s  
status- reporting structures. These structures provide registers that you  
can use to determine if certain events have occurred.  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
:STATus  
:OPERation  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle  
[:EVENt]?  
:PTRansition  
:NTRansition  
:PRESet  
:QUEStionable  
:CONDition?  
:ENABle  
[:EVENt]?  
:PTRansition  
:NTRansition  
4-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
{OPERation | QUEStionable}:CONDition?  
Queries the value of the questionable or operation condition register.  
Syntax  
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:CONDition?  
0 to 32767  
Query Response  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
Example  
Use this command to read the value of the OPERation Status or  
QUEStionable Status registers. Refer to “Monitoring the Instrument” on  
page 3- 16.  
OUTPUT 720;:STATUS:OPERATION:CONDITION?”  
4-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
{OPERation | QUEStionable}:ENABle  
Sets the enable mask for the questionable or op eration event register.  
Syntax  
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:ENABle{?| <value>}  
<integer> an integer from 0 to 65535.  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Description  
The enable mask selects which conditions in the event register cause  
the summary bit in the status byte to be set. If a bit in the enable  
mask is set true and the corresponding event occurs, the summary bit  
(bit 3 for the questionable status or bit 7 for the op eration status) in  
the status byte will be set.  
Example  
OUTPUT 720;:STATUS:QUESTIONABLE:ENABLE 1024”  
Query Response  
When queried, the largest value that can be returned is 65535. This is  
because the most- significant register bit cannot be set true.  
4-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
{OPERation | QUEStionable}[:EVENt]  
Queries the contents of the questionable or operation event registers.  
Syntax  
:STATus:{OPERation | QUEStionable}:EVENt?  
0 to 32767  
Query Response  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
Example  
The resp onse will be a number from 0 to 32767 indicating which bits  
are set. Reading the register clears the register.  
OUTPUT 720;:STATUS:OPERATION:EVENT?”  
4-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
{OPERation | QUEStionable}:NTRansition  
Selects bits in the event register which can be set by negative transi-  
tions of the corresp onding bits in the condition register.  
Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition{?| <integer>}  
<integer> an integer from 0 to 65535.  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Description  
Changes in the state of a condition register bit causes the associated  
OPERation Status or QUEStionable Status register bit to be set. This  
command allows you to select a negative bit transition to trigger an  
event to be recognized. A negative transition is defined to occur when-  
ever the selected bit changes states from a 1 to a 0. You can enter any  
value from 0 to 65535.  
When queried, the largest value that can be returned is 32767. This is  
because the most- significant register bit cannot be set true.  
Example  
OUTPUT 720;:STATUS:OPER:NTRansition 16”  
4-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
{OPERation | QUEStionable}:PTRansition  
Selects bits in the event register which can be set by p ositive transi-  
tions of the corresp onding bits in the condition register.  
Syntax  
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition{?| <integer>}  
<integer> an integer from 0 to 65535.  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Description  
Changes in the state of a condition register bit causes the associated  
OPERation Status or QUEStionable Status event register bit to be set.  
This command allows you to select a positive bit transition to trigger  
an event to be recognized. A p ositive transition is defined to occur  
whenever the selected bit changes states from a 0 to a 1. You can  
enter any value from 0 to 65535.  
When queried, the largest value that can be returned is 32767. This is  
because the most- significant register bit cannot be set true.  
Example  
OUTPUT 720;:STATUS:OPER:PTRansition 16”  
4-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STATus Subsystem  
PRESet  
Presets the enable registers and the PTRansition and NTRansition fil-  
ters.  
Syntax  
:STATus:PRESet  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Command Only  
Description  
The PRESet command is defined by SCPI to affect the enable register.  
If you want to clear all event registers and queues, use the *CLS com-  
mand.  
Table 4-18. Preset Values  
Status Node  
Preset Value  
Operation enable register  
Questionable enable register  
PTRansition filters  
0
0
32767  
0
NTRansition filters  
Example  
OUTPUT 720;:STATUS:PRESET”  
4-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SYSTem Subsystem  
SYSTem Subsystem  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
:SYSTem  
:ERRor?  
:HELP  
:HEADers?  
:PRESet  
:VERSion?  
4-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SYSTem Subsystem  
ERRor  
Queries an error from the error queue.  
Syntax  
:SYSTem:ERRor?  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
The Agilent 86120C has a 30 entry error queue. The queue is a first-  
in, first- out buffer. Repeatedly sending the query :SYSTEM:ERROR?  
returns the error numbers and descriptions in the order in which they  
occur until the queue is empty. Any further queries returns +0, “No  
errors” until another error occurs.  
For a complete list of error messages, refer to “Error Messages” on  
page 7- 11.  
Query Response  
Example  
<value>, <string>  
<value> is an integer. <string> is the text of the error message. The  
following is an example of a response:  
-113,Undefined header”  
DIM Error$[250]  
OUTPUT 720;:SYSTEM:ERROR?”  
ENTER 720;Error$  
PRINT Error$  
4-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SYSTem Subsystem  
HELP:HEADers?  
Queries a listing of all the remote p rogramming commands available  
for the Agilent 86120C.  
Syntax  
:SYSTem:HELP:HEADers?  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Comp liance: instrument sp ecific  
Query Only  
Description  
The returned ASCII string of commands is in the IEEE 488.2 arbitrary-  
block data format. The first line indicates the total number of bytes  
returned to the comp uter. That is, the # character is followed by one  
digit which indicates how many of the following digits convey the byte  
count. The next digits give the actual byte count. For examp le, in the  
listing below, 4387 bytes are indicated in the file.  
Each command in the listing is sep arated by a linefeed character.  
The following is an example of the first few lines and last few lines  
returned in the string. The term nquery indicates that a command  
cannot be sent as a query. The term qonly indicates that a command  
can only be sent as a query.  
#44387  
:ABORt/nquery/  
:CALCulate:DATA?/qonly/  
:CALCulate:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts  
:CALCulate1:DATA?/qonly/  
:CALCulate1:TRANsform:FREQuency:POINts  
:CALCulate2:DATA?/qonly/  
.
.
.
*IDN?/qonly/  
*OPC  
*RCL/nquery/  
*RST/nquery/  
*SAV/nquery/  
*SRE  
*STB?/qonly/  
*TRG/nquery/  
*TST?/qonly/  
*WAI/nquery/  
4-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SYSTem Subsystem  
PRESet  
Performs the equivalent of p ressing the front- p anel PRESET key.  
Syntax  
:SYSTem:PRESet  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Command Only  
Description  
The instrument state is set according to the settings shown in the fol-  
lowing table.  
Table 4-19. Instrument Conditions (1 of 2)  
Settings after Preset  
Key Pressed  
Settings after Power  
Turned On  
Item  
last statea  
last state  
last state  
last state  
off  
Display mode  
single wavelength  
on  
Wavelength range limiting  
Start wavelength  
Stop wavelength  
1270 nm  
1650 nm  
off  
Graphical display  
Measurement acquisition  
Wavelength calibration  
Elevation correction value  
Wavelength units  
Amplitude units  
continuous  
vacuum  
not affected  
nm  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
dBm  
Power offset  
0 dB  
Peak threshold  
10 dB  
Peak excursion  
15 dB  
4-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SYSTem Subsystem  
Table 4-19. Instrument Conditions (2 of 2)  
Settings after Preset  
Key Pressed  
Settings after Power  
Turned On  
Item  
Measurement speed  
Measurement bandwidth  
Drift measurements  
Fabry-Perot laser measurements  
Delta measurements:  
power  
normal  
narrowband  
off  
last state  
narrowband  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
wavelength  
off  
off  
wavelength and power  
reference signal position  
Signal-to-noise measurements  
measurement  
1270 nm  
1270 nm  
off  
off  
wavelength reference  
user wavelength  
auto  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
not affected  
100  
number of averages  
GPIB address  
not affected  
on  
Power-bar display  
a. The term last staterefers to the last setting that this parameter was in before the instrument power was  
turned off.  
4-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SYSTem Subsystem  
VERSion  
Queries the version of SCPI that the Agilent 86120C comp lies with.  
Syntax  
:SYSTem:VERSion  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: none  
*RST State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Query Only  
Description  
The SCPI version used in the Agilent 86120C is 1995.0.  
Table 4-20. SCPI Version Numbers  
SCPI Version  
1995.0  
Instrument Serial Prefix  
US3545 and above  
4-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
TRIGger Subsystem  
TRIGger Subsystem  
The SCPI definition defines the TRIGger subsystem to include ABORt,  
ARM, INITiate, and TRIGger commands. The Agilent 86120C has no  
ARM or TRIGger commands.  
The commands in this subsystem have the following command hierar-  
chy:  
ABORt  
INITiate  
:CONTinuous  
[:IMMediate]  
4-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABORt  
Halts the current measurement sequence and places the instrument in  
the idle state.  
Syntax  
:ABORt  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: not affected  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Command Only  
Description  
If the instrument is configured for continuous measurements, a new  
measurement sequence will begin. Otherwise, the instrument stays in  
the idle state until a new measurement is initiated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
TRIGger Subsystem  
INITiate:CONTinuous  
Selects single or continuous measurement acquisition.  
Syntax  
:INITiate:CONTinuous{?| {ON | OFF | 1 | 0}}  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: on  
*RST State: off  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Description  
When on is sp ecified, the instrument continuously measures the input  
spectrum.  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
TRIGger Subsystem  
INITiate[:IMMediate]  
Initiates a new measurement sequence.  
:INITiate:IMMediate  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Non- sequential command  
Preset State: none  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
Command Only  
Non-sequential command  
Always use an *OPC? query or a *WAI command to ensure that this command has  
the time to complete before sending any more commands to the instrument. Refer  
to Always force the Agilent 86120C to wait for non-sequential commandson  
page 3-12 for more information.  
4-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
UNIT Subsystem  
UNIT Subsystem  
The only command provided in this subsystem is the POWer command  
as shown in the following command hierarchy:  
:UNIT  
[:POWer]  
[:POWer]  
Sets the p ower units to watts (linear) or dBm (logarithmic).  
:UNIT[:POWer]{?| {W | DBM}}  
Syntax  
Attribute  
Summary  
Preset State: dBm  
*RST State: dBm  
SCPI Compliance: standard  
4-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
UNIT Subsystem  
4-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Test 1. Absolute Wavelength Accuracy 5- 3  
Test 2. Sensitivity 5- 4  
Test 3. Polarization Dep endence 5- 5  
Test 4. Op tical Inp ut Return Loss 5- 6  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity 5- 9  
Performance Tests  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Performance Tests  
Performance Tests  
The procedures in this chapter test the Agilent 86120C’s performance  
using the specifications listed in Chapter 6, “Specifications and Regula-  
tory Information” as the p erformance standard. All of the tests are  
done manually without the aid of a comp uter. None of these tests  
require access to the interior of the instrument.  
Test 1. Absolute Wavelength Accuracy 5- 3  
Test 2. Sensitivity 5- 4  
Test 3. Polarization Dep endence 5- 5  
Test 4. Op tical Inp ut Return Loss 5- 6  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity 5- 9  
Allow the Agilent 86120C to warm up for 15 minutes before doing any  
of the p erformance tests.  
Calibration Cycle  
This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. The  
instrument should have a complete verification of specifications once  
every two years.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 1. Absolute Wavelength Accuracy  
Test 1. Absolute Wavelength Accuracy  
Description  
Wavelength accuracy is verified using traceable light sources such as  
the following devices:  
• Stable lasers  
• Gas lamps  
• HeNe gas lasers  
C A U T IO N  
Do not exceed +18 dBm source power. The Agilent 86120Cs input circuitry can  
be damaged when total input power exceeds 18 dBm.  
Procedure  
Use three or four light standards that cover the Agilent 86120C’s  
wavelength range. Connect the traceable sources to the Agilent 86120C  
and verify that the Agilent 86120C is reading the sources to within the  
absolute wavelength accuracy specification.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 2. Sensitivity  
Test 2. Sensitivity  
Description  
Sensitivity is verified using the following devices:  
• Optical power meter  
• Optical attenuator  
• 1310 nm and 1550 nm lasers (>0 dBm output power)  
C A U T IO N  
Do not exceed +18 dBm source power. The Agilent 86120Cs input circuitry can  
be damaged when total input power exceeds 18 dBm.  
Procedure  
Perform the following p rocedure first using the 1310 nm laser and  
then repeat the steps using the 1550 nm laser.  
1 Connect the laser’s output to the optical attenuator’s input.  
2 Connect the optical attenuator’s output to the optical power meter.  
3 Adjust the attenuator for a reading of 0 dBm on the p ower meter.  
Record the attenuator’s setting.  
Attenuation at 0 dBm: ____________  
4 Adjust the attenuator for a reading of –35 dBm on the p ower meter.  
Record the attenuator’s setting.  
Attenuation at –35 dBm: ____________  
5 Disconnect the fiber-optic cable at the power meter’s input and connect  
the cable to the Agilent 86120C being tested.  
6 Reset the optical attenuator to the setting recorded in Step 3.  
7 Read the p ower and wavelength measured on the Agilent 86120C, and  
compare them to the specifications listed in Chapter 6, “Specifications  
and Regulatory Information”.  
8 Reset the optical attenuator to the setting recorded in Step 4.  
9 Read the p ower and wavelength measured on the Agilent 86120C, and  
compare them to the specifications listed in Chapter 6, “Specifications  
and Regulatory Information”.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 3. Polarization Dependence  
Test 3. Polarization Dependence  
Description  
Polarization Dependence is verified using the following devices:  
• 1310 nm and 1550 nm DFB lasers  
• Optical attenuator  
• Agilent 11896A polarization controller  
C A U T IO N  
Do not exceed +18 dBm source power. The Agilent 86120Cs input circuitry can  
be damaged when total input power exceeds 18 dBm.  
Procedure  
Perform the following p rocedure first using the 1310 nm laser and  
then repeat the steps using the 1550 nm laser.  
1 Turn on the lasers and allow them to warm up .  
2 Set the polarization controller to a scan rate of 5.  
3 On the Agilent 86120C, press the Preset key.  
4 Connect the laser’s optical output to the polarization controller’s optical  
input.  
5 Connect the polarization controller’s optical output to the  
Agilent 86120C being tested.  
6 Set the polarization controller to autoscan.  
7 On the Agilent 86120C, press Peak WL, Appls, and then DRIFT. Press  
MAX-MIN so that both MAX and MIN in the softkey label are highlighted.  
The display shows the total drift since the drift measurement was  
started.  
8 Wait five minutes, read the peak amplitude drift from the  
Agilent 86120C, and compare with the specification listed in Chapter 6,  
“Specifications and Regulatory Information”.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 4. Optical Input Return Loss  
Test 4. Optical Input Return Loss  
Description  
Procedure  
Inp ut return loss is verified using the following devices:  
• Agilent 8153A lightwave multimeter  
• Agilent 81553SM 1550 nm Fabry- Perot laser, SM 9/125 µm source  
module  
• Agilent 81534A return loss module  
Standard instruments (flat contacting connectors)  
1 Turn the source module’s outp ut off.  
2 Connect a single-mode patchcord between the source module’s optical  
outp ut and the return loss module’s INPUT SOURCE connector.  
3 Set the return loss module’s wavelength to 1550 nm, and select an  
average time of 1 second.  
4 Locate an HMS- 10/HRL to FC/PC patchcord. Connect the HMS- 10/HRL  
end of the patchcord to the return loss module’s OUTPUT connector.  
Terminate the other end of the cable.  
5 Zero the return loss module.  
6 Turn on the source module.  
7 Remove the termination from the cable, and leave the cable’s free end  
uncovered.  
8 The return loss module measures the reflection reference (14.6 dB  
return loss of the p atchcord’s FC/PC connector in air).  
9 Make a low- reflection termination in the HMS-10/HRL to FC/PC  
p atchcord. Do this by wrap p ing the cable 6 times around a 5 mm  
diameter mandrel.  
10 The return loss module measures the termination parameter.  
11 Connect the HMS- 10/HRL to FC/PC p atchcord to the Agilent 86120C’s  
front panel OPTICAL INPUT connector.  
12 The lightwave multimeter measures the return loss. Compare this  
measurement with the specification listed in Chapter 6, “Specifications  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 4. Optical Input Return Loss  
and Regulatory Information”.  
Procedure  
Option 022 instruments (angled contacting connectors)  
1 Turn the source module’s outp ut off.  
2 Connect a single-mode patchcord between the source module’s optical  
outp ut and the return loss module’s INPUT SOURCE connector.  
3 Set the return loss module’s wavelength to 1550 nm, and select an  
average time of 1 second.  
4 Locate an HMS- 10/HRL to FC/APC (angled FC) patchcord. Connect the  
HMS- 10/HRL end of the patchcord to the return loss module’s OUTPUT  
connector. Terminate the FC/APC end of the cable.  
5 Zero the return loss module.  
6 Turn on the source module.  
7 Remove the termination from the cable, and connect the FC/APC end  
of an FC/APC to FC/PC cable to the free end of this cable. Leave the  
cable’s free end uncovered.  
8 The return loss module measures the reflection reference (14.6 dB  
return loss of the p atchcord’s FC/PC connector in air).  
9 Disconnect the FC/APC to FC/PC cable.  
10 Make a low- reflection termination in the HMS-10/HRL to FC/APC  
p atchcord. Do this by wrap p ing the cable 6 times around a 5 mm  
diameter mandrel.  
11 The return loss module measures the termination parameter.  
12 Connect the HMS- 10/HRL to FC/APC patchcord to the Agilent 86120C’s  
front panel OPTICAL INPUT connector.  
13 The lightwave multimeter measures the return loss. Compare this  
measurement with the specification listed in Chapter 6, “Specifications  
and Regulatory Information”.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 4. Optical Input Return Loss  
FC/APC patchcord loss  
The effect of having loss in the FC/APC patchcord 1 to 2 connector pair is to under  
measure the return loss by twice the FC/APC patchcord 1 to 2 loss. For example, if  
this connector pair loss is 0.5 dB, then the actual return loss caused by the 14.6 dB  
Fresnel reflection is 15.6 dB, but we enter 14.6 dB as an R value. Then, if the  
device under test return loss is exactly 40 dB below that of the 14.6 dB Fresnel  
reflection, the optical return loss module will display 53.6 dB because the 0.5 dB  
connector pair loss (seen twice) is removed. In reality, the return loss is 54.6 dB  
(exactly 40 dB below 14.6 dB), better than that displayed.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity  
Equipment  
Procedure  
Amp litude linearity is p erformed using the following devices:  
• 1550 nm DFB lasers  
• Optical attenuator  
• Agilent 11896A polarization controller  
• Optical power meter  
Polarization sensitivity  
To ensure measurement accuracy, minimize the movement of any fiber-optic  
cables during this procedure. Moving cables causes polarization changes which  
affect amplitude measurements.  
1 Turn on the laser and allow it to warm up.  
2 Connect the laser’s output to the optical attenuator’s input.  
3 Connect the op tical attenuator’s outp ut to the p olarization controller’s  
optical input.  
4 Connect the polarization controller’s optical output to the optical power  
meter.  
5 Configure the optical power meter for 1550 nm.  
6 Adjust the optical attenuator so that the power meter measures a power  
level of 0 dBm.  
7 Enter the attenuator setting and the measured power level in the first  
row of Table 5- 21onp age 5- 11 . Be sure to enter these values into the  
“Attenuator Settings” and “Power Meter Readings” columns.  
8 Enter the measured power on the following line:  
Pwr: ____________  
9 Change the attenuator in 1 dB steps as shown in Table 5- 21, and enter  
the attenuator settings and power measurements.  
After completing this step, the first two columns of the table should be  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity  
completely filled in.  
10 Disconnect the fiber- op tic cable from the op tical p ower meter and  
connect it to the Agilent 86120C’s OPTICAL INPUT connector.  
11 Set the optical attenuator for the value that you recorded in Step 8.  
12 Place the polarization controller in the auto scan mode.  
13 Press the Agilent 86120C’s front- panel Preset key.  
14 Press List by Power, Appls, and then DRIFT.  
15 After two minutes, stop the polarization controller’s auto scan function.  
16 Press the MAX-MIN softkey so that MAX is highlighted. Enter the  
maximum drift reading on the following line:  
maximum drift: ____________  
17 Press the MAX-MIN softkey so that MIN is highlighted. Enter the  
minimum drift reading on the following line:  
minimum drift: ____________  
18 Use the values recorded in Step 8, Step 16, and Step 17 to calculate the  
p ower- correction offset value as shown in the following equation:  
minimum drift + maximum drift  
---------------------------------------------------------------------------  
offset =  
Pwr  
2
Enter the calculate value on the following line:  
power- correction offset: ____________  
19 Change the attenuator to the settings shown in Table 5- 21. For each  
setting, record the p ower measured on the Agilent 86120C.  
After completing this step, the table’s column titled “Agilent 86120C  
Power Reading” should be completely filled in.  
20 Calculate the “Linearity” value for each row in the table using the  
following equation:  
Linearity = Power Meter Reading 86120C Power Reading offset  
21 Compare the linearity values with the specification listed in Chapter 6,  
“Specifications and Regulatory Information”. The data may show  
multiple amplitude plateaus separated by small amplitude steps. This is  
not a p roblem as long as the amp litude step s are within the linearity  
specification.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Performance Tests  
Test 5. Amplitude Accuracy and Linearity  
Table 5-21. Linearity Data Values  
Desired Power  
Power Meter  
Reading  
Agilent 86120C  
Linearity  
Attenuator Setting  
(dBm)  
Power Reading  
0
1  
2  
3  
4  
5  
6  
7  
8  
9  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Definition of Terms 6- 3  
Specifications—NORMAL Update Mode 6- 5  
Specifications—FAST Update Mode 6- 8  
Operating Specifications 6- 11  
Laser Safety Information 6- 12  
Comp liance with Canadian EMC Requirements 6- 13  
Declaration of Conformity 6-14  
Product Overview 6- 15  
Specifications and Regulatory  
Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Specifications and Regulatory  
Information  
This chapter lists specification and characteristics of the instrument. The dis-  
tinction between these terms is described as follows:  
• Specifications describe warranted performance over the temperature  
range 0°C to +55°C and relative humidity <95% (unless otherwise noted).  
All specifications apply after the instrument’s temperature has been sta-  
bilized after 15 minutes of continuous operation.  
Characteristics provide useful information by giving functional, but  
nonwarranted, performance parameters. Characteristics are printed in  
italics.  
Calibration Cycle  
This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. The instrument  
should have a complete verification of specifications once every two years.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Definition of Terms  
Definition of Terms  
Wavelength  
Range refers to the allowable wavelength range of the optical input signal.  
Absolute accuracy indicates the maximum wavelength error over the allowed  
environmental conditions. The wavelength accuracy is based on fundamental  
physical constants, which are absolute standards not requiring traceability to  
artifacts kept at national standards laboratories. Two He-Ne gas lasers are  
used. First, there is an internal 632.991 nm-vacuum (473.6127 THz) reference  
laser1. To verify absolute wavelength accuracy, an external laser is measured  
during manufacturing at 1523.488 nm, or 196.7804 THz2.  
Differential Accuracy indicates the maximum wavelength error in measuring  
the wavelength difference between two signals that are simultaneously  
present.  
Minimum Resolvable Separation indicates the minimum wavelength separa-  
tion of two laser lines required to measure each wavelength simultaneously.  
Two laser lines closer in wavelength than the minimum resolvable separation  
are not resolved and one average wavelength is displayed.  
Display Resolution indicates the minimum incremental change in displayed  
wavelength.  
Amplitude  
Calibration Accuracy indicates the maximum power calibration error at the  
specified wavelengths over the allowed environmental conditions. The ampli-  
tude calibration accuracy is traceable to a National Institute of Standards and  
Technology (NIST) calibrated optical power meter. NIST is the national stan-  
dards laboratory of the United States.  
Flatness refers to the maximum amplitude error in a measurement between  
two lines that are separated in wavelength by no more than the specified  
amount.  
Linearity indicates the maximum power error in measuring the change in power  
1. Obarski, G. E. 1990. Wavelength Measurement System for Optical Fiber CommunicationsNIST  
Technical Note 1336 (February): 18. Take the average of the two frequencies straddling gain center.  
2. D. A. Jennings, F. R. Peterson, and K. M. Evenson. 1979. Frequency measurement of the 260-THz  
(1.15 micron) He-Ne laserOptics Letters Vol. 4, No. 5 (May): 129-130.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Definition of Terms  
of one laser line.  
Polarization Dependence indicates the maximum displayed power variation as  
the polarization of the input signal is varied.  
Display Resolution indicates the minimum incremental change in displayed  
power.  
Sensitivity  
Sensitivity is defined as the minimum power level of a single laser-line input to  
measure wavelength and power accurately. A laser line with less than the min-  
imum power may be measured but with reduced wavelength and power accu-  
racy. For multiple laser-lines input, sensitivity may be limited by total input  
power.  
Selectivity  
Selectivity indicates the ability to measure the wavelength and power of a  
weak laser line in the proximity of a specified stronger laser line and separated  
by the specified amount.  
Input Power  
Maximum displayed level indicates the maximum total input power (total of all  
laser lines present) to accurately measure wavelength and power.  
Maximum safe input power indicates the maximum total input power (total of  
all laser lines present) to avoid permanent optical damage to the instrument.  
Maximum Number Maximum number of lines input is the maximum number of displayed lines. If  
of Lines Input  
more than 200 lines are input, only the 200 longest wavelength lines are dis-  
played.  
Input Return Loss Input Return Loss indicates the optical power reflected back to the users fiber  
cable relative to the input power. It is limited by the return loss of the front-  
panel connector, and assumes the users connector is good.  
Measurement  
Cycle Time  
Measurement cycle time refers to the cycle time when measuring wavelength  
and power of laser lines. Specific advanced applications may require longer  
cycle times.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
SpecificationsNORMAL Update Mode  
Specifications—NORMAL Update Mode  
Each laser line is assumed to have a linewidth (including modulation side-  
bands) of less than 5 GHz.  
All specifications apply when the instrument is in the following modes:  
NORMAL up date mode unless noted. Refer to “Measurement rate” on  
page 2- 13.  
• Configured to measure narrowband devices. Specifications do not apply  
when the instrument is configured to measure broadband devices. Refer  
to “Measuring broadband devices and chirp ed lasers” on page 2- 9 .  
Wavelength  
Range  
12701650  
Absolute accuracy (lines separated by 15 GHz)  
2 ppm ( 0.003 nm at 1550 nm and 1310 nm)  
Differential accuracy (characteristic)  
1 ppm  
Minimum resolvable separationa (characteristic)  
10 GHz (0.08 nm at 1550 nm, 0.06 nm at 1300 nm)  
Display resolution  
0.001 nm  
a. Signals of equal amplitude. For lines that are separated by less than 30 GHz, wavelength accuracy is reduced.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
SpecificationsNORMAL Update Mode  
Amplitude  
Calibration accuracy at calibration wavelengths  
Flatness, 30 nm from any wavelength  
0.5 dB (at 1310 and 1550 nm 30 nm)  
1270-1600 nm (characteristic)  
1270-1650 nm (characteristic)  
0.2 dB  
0.5 dB  
0.3 dB  
Linearity, 1270 nm to 1600 nm, lines above 30 dBm  
Polarization dependence  
1270-1600 nm  
0.5 dB  
1.0 dB  
1600-1650 nm (characteristic)  
Display resolution  
0.01 dB  
Sensitivity  
1270-1600 nm, single line input  
40 dBm  
30 dBm  
1600-1650 nm, single line input  
1270-1650 nm, multiple lines input (characteristic)  
30 dB below total input power, but not less than  
single line input sensitivity.  
Selectivity  
25 dB  
10 dB  
Two lines input separated by 50 GHz (characteristic)  
Two lines input separated by 15 GHz (characteristic)  
Input Power  
+10 dBm  
+18 dBm  
200  
Maximum displayed level (sum of all lines)  
Maximum safe input level (sum of all lines)  
Maximum Number of Laser Lines Input  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
SpecificationsNORMAL Update Mode  
Input Return Loss  
With straight contactconnectors  
35 dB  
With angled contact connectors (Option 022)  
50 dB  
Measurement Cycle Time  
Normal update mode (characteristic)  
1.0 s (1 measurement-per-second)  
Measurement Applications  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (characteristic) a  
channel spacing 100 GHz  
>35 dB  
>27 dB  
channel spacing 50 GHz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio with Averaging, modulated lasers (characteristic) a  
>35 dB with 100 averages  
>27 dB with 100 averages  
channel spacing 100 GHz  
channel spacing 50 GHz  
a. 0.1 nm noise bandwidth, lines above 25 dBm.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
SpecificationsFAST Update Mode  
Specifications—FAST Update Mode  
Each laser line is assumed to have a linewidth (including modulation side-  
bands) of less than 10 GHz.  
All specifications apply when the instrument is in the following modes:  
FAST up date mode unless noted. Refer to “Measurement rate” on  
page 2- 13.  
• Configured to measure narrowband devices. Specifications do not apply  
when the instrument is configured to measure broadband devices. Refer  
to “Measuring broadband devices and chirp ed lasers” on page 2- 9 .  
Wavelength  
Range  
12701650  
Absolute accuracy (lines separated by 30 GHz)  
3 ppm ( 0.005 nm at 1550 nm, 0.004 nm at 1310 nm)  
Differential accuracy (characteristic)  
2 ppm  
Minimum resolvable separationa (characteristic)  
20 GHz (0.16 nm at 1550 nm, 0.11 nm at 1300 nm)  
Display resolution  
0.001 nm  
a. Signals of equal amplitude. For lines that are separated by less than 30 GHz, wavelength accuracy is reduced.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
SpecificationsFAST Update Mode  
Amplitude  
Calibration accuracy at calibration wavelengths  
Flatness, 30 nm from any wavelength  
0.5 dB (at 1310 and 1550 nm 30 nm)  
1270-1600 nm (characteristic)  
1270-1650 nm (characteristic)  
0.2 dB  
0.5 dB  
0.3 dB  
Linearity, 1270 nm to 1600 nm, lines above 30 dBm  
Polarization dependence  
1270-1600 nm  
0.5 dB  
1.0 dB  
1600-1650 nm (characteristic)  
Display resolution  
0.01 dB  
Sensitivity  
1270-1600 nm, single line input  
40 dBm  
30 dBm  
1600-1650 nm, single line input  
1270-1650 nm, multiple lines input (characteristic)  
30 dB below total input power, but not less than  
single line input sensitivity.  
Selectivity  
25 dB  
10 dB  
Two lines input separated by 100 GHz (characteristic)  
Two lines input separated by 30 GHz (characteristic)  
Input Power  
+10 dBm  
+18 dBm  
200  
Maximum displayed level (sum of all lines)  
Maximum safe input level (sum of all lines)  
Maximum Number of Laser Lines Input  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
SpecificationsFAST Update Mode  
Input Return Loss  
With flat contacting connectors  
35 dB  
50 dB  
With angled contacting connectors (Option 022)  
Measurement Cycle Time  
Fast update mode (characteristic)  
0.5 s (2 measurements-per-second)  
Measurement Applications  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (characteristic) a  
channel spacing 200 GHz  
>35 dB  
>27 dB  
channel spacing 100 GHz  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio with Averaging, modulated lasers  
(characteristic) a  
>35 dB with 100 averages  
>27 dB with 100 averages  
channel spacing 200 GHz  
channel spacing 100 GHz  
a. 0.1 nm noise bandwidth, lines above 25 dBm.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Operating Specifications  
Operating Specifications  
Operating Specifications  
Use  
indoor  
Power:  
70 W max  
Voltage  
100 / 115 / 230 / 240 V ~  
50 / 60 Hz  
Frequency  
Altitude  
Up to 2000 m (~ 6600 ft)  
0°C to +55°C  
Operating temperature  
Maximum relative humidity  
80% for temperatures up to 31°C decreasing linearly to 50% relative  
humidity at 40°C  
Weight  
8.5 kg (19 lb)  
Dimensions (H × W × D)  
140 × 340 × 465 mm (5.5 × 13.4 × 18.3 in)  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Laser Safety Information  
Laser Safety Information  
The light sources specified by this user guide are classified according to  
IEC 60825-1 (2001).  
The light sources comply with 21 CFR 1040.10 except for deviations pursuant to  
Laser Notice No. 50, dated 2001-July-26.  
Laser Safety  
Laser type  
LED  
1200-1650nm  
1 nW  
Wavelength  
Max. CW output power *  
Beam waist diameter  
10 µm  
0.1  
Numeric aperture  
Laser class according to IEC 60825-1 (2001)  
Max. permissible CW output power**  
1
10 mW  
* Max. CW output power means the highest possible optical CW power that the laser source can  
produce at its output.  
** Max. permissible CW output power is the highest optical power that is permitted within the  
appropriate IEC laser class.  
WA R N IN G  
Please pay attention to the following laser safety warnings:  
• Under no circumstances look into the end of an optical cable attached  
to the optical output when the device is operational. The laser radiation  
can seriously damage your eyesight.  
• Do not enable the laser when there is no fiber attached to the optical  
output connector.  
• Pressing the "active" button enables the laser. The laser is on when the  
green LED is lit.  
• The use of op tical instruments with this p roduct will increase eye haz-  
ard.  
• Refer servicing only to qualified and authorized p ersonnel.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements  
Compliance with Canadian EMC  
Requirements  
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.  
Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.  
Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration  
Acoustic Noise Emission  
LpA < 70 dB  
Geräuschemission  
LpA < 70 dB  
Operator position  
Normal position  
per ISO 7779  
am Arbeitsplatz  
normaler Betrieb  
nach DIN 45635-1  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Declaration of Conformity  
Declaration of Conformity  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Product Overview  
Product Overview  
Front view of instrument  
Rear view of instrument  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Regulatory Information  
Product Overview  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Instrument Preset Conditions 7-2  
Menu Maps 7-4  
Error Messages 7-11  
Front-Panel Fiber-Optic Adapters 7-17  
Power Cords 7-18  
Agilent Technologies Service Offices 7-18  
Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Reference  
Reference  
Instrument Preset Conditions  
Table 5-22. Instrument Preset Conditions (1 of 2)  
Settings after Preset  
Key Pressed  
Settings after Power  
Turned On  
Item  
last statea  
last state  
last state  
last state  
off  
Display mode  
single wavelength  
on  
Wavelength range limiting  
Start wavelength  
Stop wavelength  
1270 nm  
1650 nm  
off  
Graphical display  
Measurement acquisition  
Wavelength calibration  
Elevation correction value  
Wavelength units  
Amplitude units  
continuous  
vacuum  
not affected  
nm  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
dBm  
Power offset  
0 dB  
Peak threshold  
10 dB  
Peak excursion  
15 dB  
Measurement speed  
normal  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Instrument Preset Conditions  
Table 5-22. Instrument Preset Conditions (2 of 2)  
Settings after Preset  
Key Pressed  
Settings after Power  
Turned On  
Item  
Device bandwidth  
narrowband  
last state  
off  
Drift measurements  
Fabry-Perot laser measurements  
Delta measurements:  
power  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
off  
wavelength  
off  
off  
wavelength and power  
reference signal position  
Signal-to-noise measurements  
measurement  
1270 nm  
1270 nm  
off  
off  
wavelength reference  
user wavelength  
auto  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
last state  
not affected  
100  
number of averages  
GPIB address  
not affected  
on  
Power-bar display  
a. The term last staterefers to the last setting that this parameter was in before the instrument  
power was turned off.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
Menu Maps  
This section provides menu maps for the Agilent 86120C softkeys. The maps show  
which softkeys are displayed after pressing a front-panel key; they show the relation-  
ship between softkeys. The softkeys in these maps are aligned vertically instead of  
horizontally as on the actual display. This was done to conserve space and to make the  
maps easier to interpret.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
Appls Menu  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
Display Avg WL Menu  
There is no menu associated with this key.  
Measurement Cont Menu  
There is no menu associated with this key.  
Display List by Power Menu  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
Display List by WL Menu  
Delta On Menu  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
Delta Off Menu  
Display Peak WL and System Preset Menus  
Measurement Single Menu  
There is no menu associated with this key.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
System Print Menu  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Menu Maps  
System Setup Menu  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Error Messages  
Error Messages  
In this section, youll find all the error messages that the Agilent 86120C can display on  
its screen. Table 5-23 on page 7-11 lists all instrument-specific errors. Table 5-24 on  
page 7-14 lists general SCPI errors.  
Table 5-23. Instrument Specific Error Messages (1 of 3)  
Error Number  
Error Message  
1
BAD CHECKSUM FROM MOTOR  
MOTOR COMMUNICATION PROBLEM  
MOTOR NOT MOVING  
2
3
4
MOTOR INDEX PULSE NOT FOUND  
MOTOR CHIP SET INIT FAILED  
MOTOR COMMUTATION FAILURE  
MOTOR NOT SETTLED  
5
6
7
8
MOTOR DID NOT STOP  
9
MOTOR MOTION ERROR  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
MOTOR POSITION LIMIT FAILED  
MOTOR POSITION WRAP FAILED  
POWER LEVEL TOO HIGH  
DATA DOWNLOAD PROBLEM  
DATA ACQUISITION PROBLEM  
MAX NUMBER OF SIGNALS FOUND  
MOTOR INTERRUPT RECEIVED  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Error Messages  
Table 5-23. Instrument Specific Error Messages (2 of 3)  
Error Number  
Error Message  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
ROM BYTE UNERASED  
ROM WRITE OPERATION FAILED  
ROM DEFECTIVE  
ROM DATA INVALID  
ROM VERSION INCOMPATIBLE  
ROM POLLING LIMITED OUT  
INPUT OUT OF RANGE  
BAD CAL ROM DATA  
BAD CAL ROM DATA  
BAD CAL ROM DATA  
BAD CAL ROM DATA  
BAD CAL ROM DATA  
BAD CAL ROM DATA  
NVSRAM WRITE OPERATION FAILED  
SOFTWARE INITIALIZATION FAIL  
HARDWARE INITIALIZATION FAIL  
INITIALIZATION TIMEOUT  
BATTERY FAILED  
TOO MANY ERRORS  
FUNCTION NOT YET IMPLEMENTED  
PRINTER OFF LINE  
PRINTER OUT OF PAPER  
PRINTER ERROR DETECTED  
PRINTER TIMED OUT  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Error Messages  
Table 5-23. Instrument Specific Error Messages (3 of 3)  
Error Number  
Error Message  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
PRINTOUT WAS ABORTED  
NOT ALLOWED IN FABRY PEROT  
NOT ALLOWED IN S/N  
UNKNOWN KEYPRESS  
NUM LINES < NUM REFS  
NUM LINES > NUM REFS  
NO REFERENCE SIGNAL  
GAIN RANGING ERROR  
INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE  
UNKNOWN ERROR  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Error Messages  
Table 5-24. General SCPI Error Messages (1 of 3)  
Error Number  
Description  
+0  
No errors”  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
108  
109  
112  
113  
120  
121  
123  
124  
128  
131  
134  
138  
141  
148  
150  
151  
Command error (unknown command)“  
Invalid character“  
Syntax error“  
Invalid separator“  
Data type error“  
GET not allowed“  
Parameter not allowed“  
Missing parameter“  
Program mnemonic too long“  
Undefined header“  
Numeric data error”  
Invalid character in number“  
Exponent too large“  
Too many digits“  
Numeric data not allowed“  
Invalid suffix“  
Suffix too long”  
Suffix not allowed“  
Invalid character data“  
Character data not allowed“  
String data error“  
Invalid string data“  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Error Messages  
Table 5-24. General SCPI Error Messages (2 of 3)  
Error Number  
Description  
158  
161  
168  
170  
171  
178  
200  
211  
String data not allowed“  
Invalid block data“  
Block data not allowed“  
Expression error“  
Invalid expression“  
Expression data not allowed“  
Execution error“  
Trigger ignored”  
Caused by sending the *TRG command when the instrument is already  
taking a measurement or when the instrument is in continuous  
measurement mode.  
213  
221  
Init ignored”  
Caused by sending an INIT:IMM, READ, or MEASure command while a  
measurement is already in progress or while the instrument is in  
continuous measurement mode.  
Settings conflict”  
Caused by trying to set the instrument to a state that is not allowed. For  
example, turning on drift maximum and drift minimum state  
simultaneously or turning on SNR state while drift or delta state is on.  
222  
223  
224  
230  
Data out of range“  
Too much data“  
Illegal parameter value”  
Data corrupt or stale”  
Caused by trying to query measurement data immediately after a *RST  
command. For example, sending *RST; FETCh or sending *RST;  
:CALC2:DATA? pow.  
232  
273  
Data questionable”  
Caused by sending a resolution value in one of the measurement  
functions that is outside the instruments range.  
Illegal macro label”  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Error Messages  
Table 5-24. General SCPI Error Messages (3 of 3)  
Error Number  
Description  
310  
321  
350  
400  
410  
420  
430  
440  
System error“  
Out of memory”  
Too many errors“  
Query error“  
Query INTERRUPTED“  
Query UNTERMINATED“  
Query DEADLOCKED“  
Query UNTERMINATED after indef resp“  
Query was unterminated after an indefinite response.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Front-Panel Fiber-Optic Adapters  
Front-Panel Fiber-Optic Adapters  
Front Panel  
Fiber-Optic Adapter  
Description  
Agilent Part Number  
Diamond HMS-10  
81000AI  
FC/PCa  
D4  
81000FI  
81000GI  
81000KI  
81000SI  
81000VI  
81000WI  
SC  
DIN  
ST  
Biconic  
a. The FC/PC is the default front-panel optical connector.  
Dust Covers  
Agilent Part Number  
FC connector  
1005-0594  
1005-0593  
1005-0595  
1005-0596  
1005-0597  
Diamond HMS-10 connector  
DIN connector  
ST connector  
SC connector  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Power Cords  
Power Cords  
Cable Part  
No.  
Plug Type  
Country  
250V  
8120-1351  
United Kingdom, Cyprus, Nigeria, Zimbabwe,  
Singapore  
250V  
250V  
125V  
250V  
8120-1369  
8120-1689  
8120-1378  
8120-2104  
Australia, New Zealand, China  
East and West Europe, Saudi Arabia, So. Africa,  
India (unpolarized in many nations)  
United States, Canada, Mexico, Philippines,  
Taiwan  
Switzerland  
220V  
250V  
8120-3997  
8120-4211  
Denmark  
Republic of South Africa, India  
100V  
8120-4753  
Japan  
8120-5182  
8120-6868  
8120-6979  
8120-8376  
8120-8871  
Israel  
Argentinia  
Chile  
China  
Brazil, Thailand  
* Part number shown for plug is the industry identifier for the plug  
only. Number shown for cable is the Agilent Technologies part  
number for the complete cable including the plug.  
Agilent Technologies Service Offices  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Agilent Technologies Service Offices  
Before returning an instrument for service, call the Agilent Technologies Instrument  
Support Center at +1 (877) 447 7278, visit the Test and Measurement Web Sites by  
Country page at http://www.agilent.com/comms/techsupport, select your country  
and enter the Technical Supportlink, or call one of the numbers listed below.  
Agilent Technologies Service Numbers  
Austria  
0820 87 44 11  
Belgium  
Brazil  
+32 (0) 2 404 9340  
+11 7297-8600  
800 810 0508  
China  
Denmark  
Finland  
+45 70 131515  
+358 (0) 10 855 2100  
0825 010 700  
France  
Germany  
India  
01805 24 6337  
1600 112 626  
Italy  
+39 02 9260 8484  
+353 1890 924 204  
0120 421 345  
Ireland  
Japan  
Korea  
080 769 0800  
Mexico  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Russia  
(5) 258-4826  
+31 (0) 20 547 2111  
+47 67101 080  
+7 (095) 797 3930  
+34 91 631 3300  
0200 88 22 55  
Spain  
Sweden  
Switzerland  
United Kingdom  
United States  
0800 80 5353  
+44 (0) 7004 666666  
+1 (877) 447 7278  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
ASNR, 48  
softkey, 28  
AVERAGE annotation, 7  
average wavelength, iii, 7  
Avg WL key, 7, 8  
Numerics  
1 nm annotation, 27, 30  
B
A
BAR OFF softkey, 11  
BAR ON softkey, 11  
bit error rate, 25  
block diagram, 5  
BROAD annotation, 9  
BROAD softkey, 9  
broadband devices, measuring, 9  
programming command, 84  
broadband mode, 9, 5, 8  
BY PWR annotation, 6  
BY WL annotation, 6  
ABORt programming command, 104  
ABORT softkey, 39  
ac power cables, 6  
adapters, fiber optic, 17  
adding parameters, 25  
address. See GPIB address  
Agilent Technologies offices, 18  
air, measurements in, 37  
AM modulation, 15, 34  
amplitude  
offset, 36  
specifications, 6, 9  
annotation  
* (asterisk), 4, 14  
1 nm, 27, 30  
C
cabinet, cleaning, vii, 2  
CAL softkey, 8  
AVERAGE, 7  
BROAD, 9  
BY PWR, 6  
BY WL, 6  
CALCulate1 subsystem, 25  
CALCulate2 subsystem, 31  
CALCulate3 subsystem, 14, 34, 37, 39, 44  
calibration  
DRIFT, 22  
accuracy, 3  
M, 4  
cycle, 2  
PEAK, 4  
elevation, 8  
PWR OFS, 36  
Remote, 3  
S/N AUTO, 25  
measurements, 37  
medium for light, 9  
care  
S/N USER, 25  
STD AIR, 37  
VAC, 37  
Appls  
key, 23, 28, 31  
menu map, 5  
ARRay programming command, 15  
of cabinet, vii, 2  
of fiber optics, v  
case sensitivity, 24  
channel spacing, 19  
characteristics, 5  
chirped lasers, 9  
classification  
ASNR  
product, vii  
CLEar programming command, 46  
COUNt programming command, 47  
* (asterisk), 4, 14  
attenuation. See external attenuation  
audio modulation, effects of, 15, 34  
AUTO  
classification, laser, vi, 12  
cleaning  
adapters, 49  
cabinet, vii, 2  
fiber-optic connections, 40, 48  
non-lensed connectors, 48  
CLEAR softkey, 23  
programming command, 69  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
*CLS, 21, 3  
CM 1 softkey, 13  
DEVICES softkey, 9  
DFB lasers, 9  
Cmd_opc subroutine, 29  
dispersion. See calibration, measurements  
colon, 25  
display  
commands  
combining, 24  
annotation. See annotation  
cursor, 6  
common, 23  
modes, 3  
measurement instructions, 23  
non sequential, 12, 29, 34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41,  
42, 43, 85, 105, 106  
standard SCPI, 23  
resolution, 4, 6, 9  
scrolling through, 6  
setting update rate, 14  
softkeys blanked, 3  
update rate, 13  
termination, 27  
common commands  
*CLS (clear status), 3  
*ESE (event status enable), 28, 3  
*ESR (event status register), 5  
*IDN (identification number), 29, 6  
*OPC (operation complete), 29, 7  
*RST (reset), 29, 8  
DISPlay subsystem, 75  
down-arrow softkey, 6  
DRANge programming command, 34  
DRIFT  
annotation, 22  
softkey, 23  
drift, laser. See laser drift  
*SRE (service request enable), 10  
*STB (status byte), 12  
*TRG (trigger), 13  
dust caps, 48  
dust covers, 17  
*TST (test), 13  
*WAI (wait), 14  
definition, 23  
E
E15 MAX NUMBER OF SIGNALS FOUND message,  
17  
sending, 25  
E46 NUM LINES < NUM REFS message, 23  
E47 NUM LINES > NUM REFS message, 23  
EDFA amplifier, 9  
ELEV softkey, 8, 38  
elevation  
computer control, 5  
CONFigure measurement instruction, 15  
connector  
care, 40  
connector care, 40  
changing feet to meters, 8, 38  
effects of, 37  
entering, 8, 38  
ELEVation programming command, 84, 85  
ENABle programming command, 92  
EOI signal, 27  
Cont key, 14, 23  
CONT softkey, 39  
CONTinuous programming command, 105  
cotton swabs, 48  
covers, dust, 17  
cursor, 6  
Err_mngmt subroutine, 29  
error  
messages, 11  
D
damaged shipment, 4  
data corrupt or stale, 26, 8, 15  
data questionable, 15  
DATA? programming command, 26, 32, 49, 88  
DBM softkey, 13  
queue, 22  
ERRor programming command, 98  
Error_msg subroutine, 28  
*ESE, 28, 3  
*ESR, 5  
default GPIB address, 3  
Delta Off softkey. See Off  
Delta On softkey. See On  
EVENT programming command, 91, 93  
event status enable register, 28, 4  
example programs, 28  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
increase source accuracy, 41  
measure DFB laser, 30  
HP BASIC, 2, 28  
measure SNR, 39  
I
measure WDM channel drift, 34  
measure WDM channel separation, 37  
measure WDM channels, 32  
external attenuation, 36  
*IDN?, 29, 6  
IEC Publication 1010, vi  
IEEE 488.2 standard, 2  
IMMediate programming command, 80, 106  
init ignored, 15  
F
initializing the instrument, 3  
input  
connector, iii, 40  
power, definition of, 4  
INPUT connector, v  
inspecting  
Fabry-Perot lasers, iii, 9  
measuring, 15, 31  
fast fourier transform, 29  
FAST softkey, 14, 9, 88  
FETCh measurement instruction, 15  
fiber optics  
instrument, 4  
adapters, 17  
installing, 2  
care of, v  
instrument  
cleaning connections, 40  
connectors, covering, 12  
firmware version  
displayed, 7  
addressing over GPIB, 3  
default state, 2  
front view, 15  
preset conditions, 100, 2  
rear view, 15  
over GPIB, 6  
flatness, 3, 6, 9  
returning for service, 11  
state when turned on, 100, 2  
integration limits, 9  
FNIdentity function, 29  
FP TEST softkey, 31  
FPERot programming command, 6267  
FREQuency programming command, 19, 51, 70  
front panel  
L
laser  
adapters, 17  
labels, 15  
aperture, vi  
classification, vi, 12  
drift, iii, 22, 23  
line separation, iii, 18  
linewidth, 2  
lockout, 3  
fuse  
values, vii  
modulated, 34  
tuning power, 4  
Laser safety, 12  
LEFT programming command, 76  
LIM OFF softkey, 10  
LIM ON softkey, 10  
LINE key, 7  
G
GPIB  
address, 3  
address, changing from front panel, 4  
address, default, 3  
softkey, 4  
linearity, 4, 6, 9  
line-power  
cable, 5  
cables, 18  
initial state, 100, 2  
requirements, 5  
H
hardcopy. See printer  
HCOPy subsystem, 80  
HELP:HEADers? programming command, 99  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
specifications, 11  
linewidth, 2  
List by Power  
menu map, 6  
mode, 9  
softkey, 6, 23  
List by WL  
relative power, 18  
relative wavelength, 18  
repetitive data formats, 27  
signal-to-noise, 25, 28  
single acquisition, 14  
SONET format present, 27, 35  
speed, 13, 9, 29, 88  
total power, 8  
key, 6  
menu map, 7  
units, 12  
mode, 9  
update rate, 9, 29, 88  
in vacuum, 37  
measuring  
chirped lasers, 9  
EDFA amplifiers, 9  
menu maps, 4  
softkey, 6, 23  
LOCAL softkey, 3  
long form commands, 23  
lowercase letters, 24  
messages, error, 11  
microwatts, 13  
milliwatts, 13  
M
M annotation, 4  
MAGNitude programming command, 87  
MAX NUMBER OF SIGNALS FOUND, 17  
maximum power input, iv  
MAXimum programming command, 76  
MAX-MIN softkey, 23  
MEASure measurement instruction, 30, 32, 15  
measurement  
modulated lasers, 34  
monitoring the instrument, 16  
MW softkey, 13  
N
nanometers, 13  
accuracy, 3  
NARROW softkey, 9  
air, in, 37  
narrowband mode, 9  
AM modulation, 15, 34  
audio modulation, effects of, 15, 34  
average wavelength, 7  
calibration, 37  
new-line character, 27  
NEXT PK softkey, 5  
NEXT programming command, 77  
NEXT WL softkey, 5  
channel separation, 20  
channel spacing, 19  
NM softkey, 13  
noise declaration, 13  
continuous acquisition, 14  
cycle time, 4, 7, 10  
noise power  
automatic interpolation, 26  
definition of peaks, 15  
elevation, effects of, 37  
Fabry-Perot lasers, 31  
flatness, 21  
via GPIB, 5  
instructions, 23, 15  
bandwidth, 27, 30  
user entered wavelength, 27  
non-sequential command, 12, 29, 34, 35, 37, 38,  
39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 85, 105, 106  
NORMAL softkey, 14, 9, 88  
notation definitions, 2  
NTRansition programming command, 94  
NUM LINES < NUM REFS, 23  
NUM LINES > NUM REFS, 23  
numbers, 25  
laser drift, 22  
laser line separation, 18  
modulated lasers, effects of, 34  
monitoring performance over time, 22  
multiple laser lines, 6, 12  
of broadband devices, 9  
PRBS format present, 27, 35  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
PRBS, 27, 35  
Preset  
conditions set by, 100, 2  
key, 2, 9, 4  
menu map, 8  
PRESet programming command, 50, 59, 96, 100  
PREV PK softkey, 5  
PREV WL softkey, 5  
PREVious programming command, 77  
Print  
O
Off  
key, 20  
menu map, 8  
On  
key, 20  
menu map, 7  
*OPC, 29, 3, 7  
OPTICAL INPUT connector, iii, vi, 14  
output queue, 22, 27  
key, 39  
menu map, 9  
printer  
cable, 6  
connecting, 6  
output, 39  
P
packaging for shipment, 13  
PARALLEL PRINTER PORT connector, 6, 39  
parameters, adding, 25  
PEAK  
programming, 2  
command notation convention, 2  
examples. See example programs  
list of commands by key, 48  
list of commands by subsystem, 43  
measurement instructions, 15  
programming command, 48  
PTRansition programming command, 95  
PWR BAR softkey, 11  
PWR OFS  
annotation, 4  
softkey, 5, 28  
peak  
definition of, 15  
excursion, 9, 16  
power, iii, 4  
threshold limit, 15, 17, 35  
wavelength, iii, 4  
Peak WL  
key, 4  
menu map, 8  
softkey, 4, 23  
annotation, 36  
softkey, 36  
PWR softkey, 21  
performance tests, 2  
PEXCursion programming command, 33  
PK EXC softkey, 17  
PK THLD softkey, 17  
POINts? programming command, 29, 34, 68  
polarization dependence, 4, 6, 9  
power  
Q
queries, 27  
multiple, 27  
queues, 22  
bar, iv, 4, 11  
R
maximum before damage, 2  
maximum input, iv  
maximum measurable, 2  
measuring total, 7, 32, 35  
peak, 4  
separation, 18  
state when turned on, 100, 2  
tuning laser, 4  
POWer programming command, 17, 51, 107  
POWER softkey, 13  
radiation exposure, vi  
range, wavelength, 37  
READ measurement instruction, 15  
rear panel  
labels, 15  
regulatory duration, 2  
Remote annotation, 3  
repetitive data formats, 27  
RESet programming command, 59  
RESET softkey, 21, 23, 24  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
return loss, 4, 7, 10  
returning  
Single key, 14, 16, 31  
softkey  
data, 27  
menus, 4  
for service, 11  
SONET, 27, 35  
RF modulation, 35  
RIGHT programming command, 78  
*RST, 3, 29, 8  
specifications, 2, 5  
and wideband mode, 9  
definition of terms, 2  
operating, 11  
spurious signals  
suppressing, 15  
*SRE, 10  
standard  
air, 9, 37  
event status register, 5  
SCPI commands, 23  
STATe programming command, 35, 50, 54, 55, 56,  
57, 58, 60, 61, 73, 78  
status  
byte register, 12  
reporting, 16  
STATus subsystem, 90  
*STB, 12  
STD AIR  
annotation, 37  
softkey, 9, 38  
S
S/N AUTO annotation, 25  
S/N softkey, 28  
S/N USER annotation, 25  
safety, vi, vii  
laser classification, vii  
symbols, iii  
sales and service offices, 18  
SCALar programming command, 15  
SCPI (standard commands for programmable in-  
struments)  
standard, 2  
syntax rules, 23  
SELECT softkey, 6, 19  
selectivity, 4, 6, 9  
semicolon, 23  
sending common commands, 25  
SENSe subsystem, 83  
sensitivity, 4, 6, 9  
serial number  
instrument, 4  
subsystems, 23  
swabs, 48  
syntax rules, 2327  
SYSTem subsystem, 97  
service, 11  
request enable register, 21, 10  
returning for, 11  
T
Tempo subroutine, 29  
terahertz, 13  
sales and service offices, 18  
Set_ese subroutine, 28  
settings conflict error, 14, 36, 48, 50, 54, 55, 57,  
58, 60, 61, 73, 15  
Setup  
key, 10, 11, 4  
THRSHLD softkey, 16  
THZ softkey, 13  
total power, iii, 8  
maximum measurable, 36  
measuring, 7  
menu map, 10  
shipping  
transient data, 11  
*TRG, 13  
procedure, 12  
short form commands, 23  
signal-to-noise  
trigger ignore, 15  
TRIGger subsystem, 103  
*TST, 13  
measurements, 25  
noise calculation, 25, 69  
ratios, iii  
U
UNIT subsystem, 107  
specification, 7, 10  
Index-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
units of measure, 12  
UNITS softkey, 12  
up-arrow softkey, 6  
UPDATE softkey, 14  
uppercase letters, 24  
USER softkey, 28  
USER WL softkey, 28  
UW softkey, 13  
V
VAC annotation, 37  
VACuum programming command, 86  
VACUUM softkey, 9, 38  
vacuum, measurements in, 37  
VERSion programming command, 102  
W
*WAI, 14  
wave number, 13  
wavelength  
definition of, 3  
input range, 2  
peak, 4  
range, 37  
separation, 18  
specifications, 5, 8  
WAVelength programming command, 21, 52, 71  
WDM  
flatness, 21  
system, 18  
white space characters, 25  
WL LIM softkey, 10  
WL REF softkey, 28  
WL softkey, 20  
WL softkey, 13  
WL/PWR softkey, 20  
WLIMit programming command, 37, 38, 40, 41, 42,  
43  
WNUMber programming command, 23, 53, 72  
Index-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
www.agilent.com  
Agilent Technologies GmbH 2004  
Printed in Germany August 2004  
Second edition, August 2004  
86120-90C03  
Agilent Technologies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

3Com Network Card 3C996B T User Manual
3Com Switch 10014298 User Manual
Activision Video Games 47875842052 User Manual
ADTRAN Network Card U BR1TE User Manual
Aiphone Intercom System GF 10K User Manual
Alpine Cassette Player TDM 7582E User Manual
Barco Projector Accessories E 2320 C SE User Manual
BB Electronics Switch EIR208 User Manual
Behringer Music Mixer MX9000 User Manual
Beko MP3 Player MP 300 R User Manual